summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/old/66773-0.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'old/66773-0.txt')
-rw-r--r--old/66773-0.txt6646
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 6646 deletions
diff --git a/old/66773-0.txt b/old/66773-0.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index b36871e..0000000
--- a/old/66773-0.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6646 +0,0 @@
-The Project Gutenberg eBook of Two Years among New Guinea Cannibals, by A.
-E. Pratt
-
-This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
-most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
-whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
-of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
-www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
-will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before
-using this eBook.
-
-Title: Two Years among New Guinea Cannibals
- A Naturalist’s Sojourn among the Aborigines of Unexplored New
- Guinea
-
-Author: A. E. Pratt
- Henry Pratt
-
-Release Date: November 19, 2021 [eBook #66773]
-
-Language: English
-
-Character set encoding: UTF-8
-
-Produced by: Richard Tonsing and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team
- at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was produced from images
- generously made available by The Internet Archive)
-
-*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TWO YEARS AMONG NEW GUINEA
-CANNIBALS ***
-
-
-
-
- TWO YEARS AMONG NEW
- GUINEA CANNIBALS
-
-
-[Illustration:
-
- TWO NEW GUINEA DANDIES.
-
- They are natives of Dinawa. Notice their tight-laced waists and the
- nose ornaments (chimani) of polished shell.
-]
-
-
-
-
- TWO YEARS AMONG NEW GUINEA CANNIBALS
- A Naturalist’s Sojourn among the Aborigines of Unexplored New Guinea
-
-
- By
- A. E. PRATT
-
- Gill Memorialist, Royal Geographical Society, 1891 Author of “To the
- Snows of Tibet through China,” etc.
-
-
- With Notes and Observations by his Son
- HENRY PRATT
- And Appendices on the Scientific Results of the Expedition
-
-
- _With 54 Illustrations and a Map_
-
-
- PHILADELPHIA
- J. B. LIPPINCOTT COMPANY
- LONDON: SEELEY & CO. LTD.
- 1906
-
-
-
-
- Printed by BALLANTYNE, HANSON & CO.
- At the Ballantyne Press
-
-
-
-
- TO
-
- _MY WIFE_
-
- THE COMPANION, PRESENT OR ABSENT OF MY MANY WANDERINGS
-
-
-
-
- PREFACE
-
-
-This record of two years’ scientific work in the only country of the
-globe that has still escaped exploration purposely avoids the dry detail
-of a Natural History Report, such as might properly be submitted to a
-learned society, and is intended rather to set forth to the general
-reader the vicissitudes of the traveller’s daily life in unknown New
-Guinea, or Papua as I prefer to call it. Every hour brought a new
-interest, and it was with the intention of trying to communicate some
-impression of that wonderful land in which we sojourned, that the
-present account has been undertaken. If the result is disappointing to
-the reader, the fault must lie with the writer and not with Papua.
-
-During my brief residences in the known parts of New Guinea, I received
-much kind assistance and furtherance in my marches into the wilds from
-officials, missionaries, and settlers, and I would here especially
-acknowledge my indebtedness to his Excellency the Lieutenant-Governor,
-Mr. G. Ruthven Le Hunte, Mr. A. Musgrave, C.B., Captain Barton, the Hon.
-D. Ballantine, Mr. Robert Hislop, and Mr. James Wood; His Grace
-Archbishop Navarre, Coadjutor Bishop de Boismenu, both of the Sacred
-Heart Mission; Dr. Laws and the Rev. H. Dauncey of the London Missionary
-Society.
-
-The Dutch officials to whom I am under deep obligations are Mr. Kroesen,
-the Resident of Merauke, Mr. M. C. Schadee, the Controller, and also the
-captain of the gunboat _Neas_.
-
-For permission to reprint the section on the Lakatois and several other
-passages I am indebted to the _Wide World Magazine_, and the chapter on
-“British Trade Prospects in New Guinea” is given by consent of the
-_British Trade Journal_.
-
-My particular acknowledgments are due to Messrs. G. H. Kendrick, Mr. G.
-T. Bethune Baker, F.L.S., and Miss Wilmott, without whose help the
-expedition could not have been undertaken, and I must also mention Mr.
-S. H. Soper, F.R.G.S., another friend whose interest and assistance was
-of the greatest value to me.
-
- A. E. P.
-
-
-
-
- CONTENTS
-
-
- CHAPTER I
-
- BREAKING THE GROUND
-
- PAGE
-
- The Author’s many Journeys—New Guinea more Interesting than all—
- The Second Largest Island in the World, and the last to Guard
- its Secrets from Man—Its Vast Possibilities to the Trader and
- the Man of Science—Great Riches in Birds and Insects—770 known
- Species of Birds—The People—Their Many Dialects—A Geographical
- Reason for this—Toilsome Travel—Razor-like Ridges in Endless
- Succession—The Author’s Camps—Journeys Outlined—In Unexplored
- Country—Gorgeous Scenery—Variations of Temperature—The Chief
- Bugbear, Transport 17
-
-
- CHAPTER II
-
- DISAPPOINTMENTS IN DUTCH NEW GUINEA
-
- Dutch New Guinea—The Coast—Unsavoury Mud-banks—Merauke—The Dutch
- Settlement described—Its Wonderful Modernity—A Fierce Tribe, the
- Tugeri, now described for the first time—Their Appearance and
- Habits—Their Continual Murderous Raids—The Fearful Bamboo Knife—
- Scientific Work here impossible owing to Danger of going beyond
- Settlement Boundaries—Outbreak of a Mysterious Disease at
- Merauke—Its Swift Deadliness—The Symptoms—Determine to leave
- Dutch New Guinea and prepare for a March into the Unexplored
- Interior 37
-
-
- CHAPTER III
-
- CHANGES AND STRANGE SCENES
-
- We sail to Thursday Island—A Rough Voyage in a Cattle-boat—A
- Glimpse of Thursday Island—The Wonderful Colour of its Waters—We
- reach Port Moresby—Contrast to the Scenery of Dutch New Guinea—
- Magnificent Mountains—Evidences of Drought—Vegetation burnt up—
- The British Government Post of Port Moresby described—A Good
- Second to Hades or Aden—The Great Sight of Port Moresby—A
- Community of Hereditary Potters—The Pottery Trading Fleet—The
- Strange Vessels called Lakatois—Their Structure—Native Orgies
- before the Expedition starts—A New Guinea Ballet on Deck—
- Seclusion of Women after the Young Braves depart with the Fleet—
- My Inland Expedition fitted out—Official Courtesy—Details of
- Baggage—Transport procured after Immense Trouble 59
-
-
- CHAPTER IV
-
- WE STRIKE INLAND
-
- We start Inland—Friendly Natives but Hostile Mosquitoes—Bioto
- Creek—Bioto—Guest Houses—A splendid Game Region—Daily Migration
- of Flocks of Pigeons—Greedy Coast Natives—Carriers Inadequate—A
- Double Journey in Relays—We meet the Chief Mavai, a great Papuan
- Character—Mavai’s Way of Life—His Harem—His Western Notions—His
- Trousers—His Red Coat—His Severe Discipline—As we proceed,
- Construction of Native Houses more elaborate—On to Ekeikei and
- Dinawa—March through Wet Vegetation—Tortured by Leeches and an
- Abominable Parasite, the Scrub-Itch—A Gloomy Forest—Magnificent
- Orchids—Carriers stimulate Laggard Comrades with Nettles—The
- Aculama River—I discover a New Fish 81
-
-
- CHAPTER V
-
- THE FIRST CAMP
-
- Journey continued—A Glorious Scarlet Creeper—Dinawa—Site for Camp
- selected—Building Camp—Native Assistance—Organisation for
- Scientific Work—Daily Routine—Teaching the Natives how to Catch
- and Handle Entomological Specimens—Sudden Affluence leads one of
- my Native Boys to Desert—He is Caught and Reformed—My best
- Native Assistant and his Wife—Female Influence a great Asset
- with other Women—The Day’s Work—Collecting at Night—Photography—
- A Dark Room in the Wilds—Native Interest in Developing 105
-
-
- CHAPTER VI
-
- VICISSITUDES AND A DIGRESSION
-
- The Drought affects our Work—Butterflies begin to Fail—Forest
- Fires—We descend to the St. Joseph River—A Temporary Camp—A
- Wonderful Native Suspension Bridge—River Scenery—Native Methods
- of Fishing—Dull Weather and Little Success in Collecting—A Comic
- Incident—A Native besieged by a Wild Pig—War—Native Hostility—A
- Chief threatens to Cook and Eat our Heads—Strict Guard kept on
- Camp—The Bird of Paradise—Papuan Game Laws—Natives’ Interest in
- Writing—Further Stay at the St. Joseph impracticable—A Flood
- destroys our Bridge—A Visit to a Native Village—Curious Means of
- Ingress—Return to Dinawa—My Cingalese Headman’s Experiences—He
- evades Native Treachery—Sudden Growth of New Township 125
-
-
- CHAPTER VII
-
- GOOD-BYE TO DINAWA
-
- A Beautiful New Orchid discovered and described—Drought continues—
- Sufferings of the Natives—I practise as a Physician—Queer Native
- Diagnosis—Gaberio, an Intelligent Native, goes collecting on his
- own account—How we kept touch—The Wireless Telegraph of the
- Wilds—We determine to take our Specimens to the Coast—Methods of
- Preservation and Packing—Gaberio returns—He tells of the Murder
- of one of his Boys—Hardships of Camp Life—Food and Ammunition
- fail—We try Cockatoo Soup—A Visit from a Fine Hill Tribe, the
- Ibala—They brighten the Last Days of our Stay—Gorgeous Sunsets
- at Dinawa—The Ibala People return according to Contract to act
- as Carriers—We depart—Trials of the March to the Coast—A Mishap
- at Sea—Our Fine Herbarium ruined with Salt Water—Port Moresby
- once again 141
-
-
- CHAPTER VIII
-
- INACTION AND AN EXCURSION
-
- Period of Inaction at Port Moresby—Christmas in New Guinea—A
- Scratch Dinner—A Christmas Privilege for Cingalese to obtain
- Spirits—Curious Effect on One Individual—A Noteworthy Character—
- An Excursion to Hula—A Fisher Community—A Piebald People—
- Picturesque Night Fishing by Flare Light—Fishermen often Killed
- by Gare-Fish—Hula Houses—Various Traits of Native Life—A Walk
- round Hood’s Bay—Traces of Initiatory Rites at Kalo—The Kalo
- Houses described—On to Kerapuna—A Shooting Expedition—We lose
- the Trail—Class Distinctions at Kerapuna—Return to Port Moresby
- by Sea—A Perilous Voyage in a Little Canoe—Tragic Death of
- Flood, the Naturalist 165
-
-
- CHAPTER IX
-
- TOWARDS THE UNEXPLORED
-
- Beginning of Furthest Journey into Unexplored Interior—The
- Everlasting Question of Carriers—Difficulties and Delays—Epa
- again—Curious Method of Water Supply—Mavai welcomes us back—He
- provides a Dubious Treat—Ekeikei—The Building of a Permanent
- Camp—An Elaborate Undertaking—House-building on a Large Scale—
- Ingenious Papuan Methods of Thatching—The Chief Kafulu proves
- Unneighbourly—He does not fulfil his Engagements—Ow-bow’s
- Embassy—My Deputy is robbed—Precautions in Camp against Attack—I
- go down to Kafulu and deal faithfully with him—He relents, and
- restores Ow-bow’s Goods—An Earthquake and Hurricane at Ekeikei 183
-
-
- CHAPTER X
-
- UPS AND DOWNS
-
- My man Sam goes to the Kebea to collect—We go to the Coast again
- with our Specimens—A Dreadful Night in Bioto Creek—A Crocodile
- River—A Tempestuous Voyage to Thursday Island—Fever—Return to
- Port Moresby—Adrift for Three Days in a Heavy Sea—A German
- Captain’s Thrilling Story of the Storm—We return to Ekeikei—A
- New Trouble—Epidemic of Measles among Native Followers—Harry
- goes off alone among Cannibals—Adventurous Journey of a Boy of
- Sixteen—Description of Native Village on a 15–inch-wide Ridge 201
-
-
- CHAPTER XI
-
- A BOY OF SIXTEEN ALONE WITH CANNIBALS
-
- Further into the Mountains—A Murder—The Settlement of the Blood
- Price—A Pig for a Life—Harry’s Further Adventures alone among
- Cannibals—Various other Murders—The Village of Amana—A Tree
- House—The Lunatic at Amana—Foula—A Pretty Village 221
-
-
- CHAPTER XII
-
- THE UNEXPLORED: AMONG PAPUAN PEAKS
-
- Still Higher in the Owen Stanley Range—The Road to Mafulu—Beauties
- of the Forest—The Hill Step—Curious Habit of Walking acquired in
- Abrupt Ground—Cold at High Altitudes—A New Camp built—Alpine
- Signs in Insects and Flowers—Routine Work—Food runs low again—
- Native Thieves—Followers discontented—They fear the Hostile
- Mafulu People—Daily Threats of Desertion—Strict Watch—My Rule
- for Night Visitors—Compulsory Carrying of Torches and Disarming—
- Weirdly Picturesque Night Scenes—Further Privations—Bird of
- Paradise Soup—Ugh!—Decide to depart—Natives burn down Camp to
- ensure our going 241
-
-
- CHAPTER XIII
-
- LAST JOURNEY TO THE COAST
-
- A Dangerous Stream-Crossing—Babooni—Sunshine once more—Successful
- Work—Poor Fare—Messengers to Ekeikei—The Tree-Cabbage—Method of
- Cooking Tree-Cabbage—A Great Curiosity—Spiders’ Webs as
- Fishing-Nets—Dancing Festivals—Back to the Kebea—Our Bean Crop—A
- Papuan Parliament—We obtain Credit—A Wife-Beater—My only Act of
- Perfidy—The Journey to Ekeikei—Back to the Land of Plenty—Last
- Visit to Epa—Mavai unfriendly—He is talked over and supplies
- Carriers—Example better than Precept—The Coast again—An
- Accident—The Natives drink Sea-Water—Good-bye to the
- Mountaineers 259
-
-
- CHAPTER XIV
-
- A FORTY-MILE TRAMP BY THE SHORE
-
- A Comfortless Voyage—A Forty-Mile Tramp along the Coast—Wonders of
- the Beach—Armies of Soldier-Crabs—A Crocodile River—A Dangerous
- Canoe Voyage—At Port Moresby—A Pathetic Incident—Last Days of
- our Stay in New Guinea 279
-
-
- CHAPTER XV
-
- NATIVE MANNERS AND CUSTOMS
-
- The Papuan at Home—His Good Points—Physical Characteristics—
- Ceremonial Dress—Coast and Hill Tribes—Differences—Local
- Distribution of the Rami or Petticoat—Its Decrease in Length in
- the Mountains—Its Disappearance at Epa—Dandyism—The Priceless
- Chimani—The Shell Armlet—Household Constitution—Rudimentary
- Government—Courtship and Marriage—The Price of a Wife—Position
- of Women—Six Ways of Carrying an Infant—Meal Times—Weapons—
- Clubs—Their Manufacture the Monopoly of One Tribe—Weird Tribal
- Dances 289
-
-
- CHAPTER XVI
-
- BURIAL, WITCHCRAFT, AND OTHER THEMES
-
- A Short-lived Race—An Aged Man a Curiosity—Burial Customs—The
- Chief Mourner painted Black—Period of Mourning brief except for
- the Chief Mourner—No Belief in Natural Death—Poison always
- Suspected—Religion all but absent—Vague Belief in Magic—Fi-fi, a
- Form of Divination—How practised—Its Utter Childishness—No Idea
- of Number—Forest Warnings—“Wada,” another Form of Sorcery—
- Mavai’s Hideous Magical Compounds—A People seemingly without
- History or Legends—Pictures understood—Fear of the Stereoscope—
- The “Bau-bau” or Social Pipe—How Made and Smoked—Incidents of
- Travel—The Stinging Trees—Ideas of Medicine—Sovereign Remedies—
- Bleeding—How practised—Hunting—The Corral—A Strange Delicacy—
- Story of Native Trust in Me—A Loan of Beads—Children and their
- Sports—Thirty Ways of Cat’s-Cradle 309
-
-
- CHAPTER XVII
-
- A NOTE ON BRITISH TRADE PROSPECTS IN NEW GUINEA
-
- Sandalwood—The Sea-Slug—Copra and Cocoa-Nut—Coffee—Cocoa—Chillies—
- Rubber—Stock-Raising—Gold—Tobacco—Imports—German Enterprise—Our
- Lost Coaling Station 333
-
-
- CHAPTER XVIII
-
- NOTES ON SOME BIRDS OF NEW GUINEA
-
- The Birds of Paradise—Remarkable Species observed—Native Names—
- Play-Places—Curious Habits—The Bower-Bird: Artist, Architect,
- and Gardener 345
-
-
- APPENDICES 351
-
-
-
-
- LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
-
-
- TWO NEW GUINEA DANDIES _Frontispiece_
-
- PAGE
- LAKATOIS PREPARING TO SAIL 21
-
- THE BOWER-BIRD 27
-
- GUARDING THE WORKERS 33
-
- TUGERI NATIVES 41
-
- THE NATIVE METHOD OF TREE CLIMBING 47
-
- A LAKATOI AND A HOUSE ON PILES 55
-
- SAM AND HIS WIFE 63
-
- HANUABADA GIRLS DANCING 69
-
- GIRLS DANCING ON A LAKATOI 75
-
- EPA VILLAGE 85
-
- EKEIKEI NATIVES 91
-
- THE CAMP AT EKEIKEI 97
-
- NATIVE COLLECTORS 101
-
- HILL NATIVES AT DINAWA 109
-
- DOBOI, OUR NATIVE COOK 115
-
- THE NATIVE VILLAGE OF DINAWA 121
-
- FISHING ON THE ST. JOSEPH RIVER 131
-
- A ROUGH BRIDGE 137
-
- NATIVE WOMEN AT DINAWA 145
-
- THE WIRELESS TELEGRAPHY OF NEW GUINEA 149
-
- NATIVES OF ENUMAKA 155
-
- VEGETATION AT DINAWA 161
-
- A PIEBALD PEOPLE 169
-
- A HOUSE AT KALO 177
-
- THE VILLAGES OF ELEVADA AND HANUABADA 187
-
- NEW GUINEA HOUSE-BUILDING 193
-
- THE PRIMEVAL FOREST 197
-
- POLLING LAKATOIS 205
-
- HOUSES AT HANUABADA 209
-
- A DESERTED VILLAGE 215
-
- HARRY PRATT 225
-
- CAMP IN THE OWEN STANLEY RANGE 231
-
- TWO VIEWS OF A NATIVE BRIDGE 237
-
- CAMP IN THE OWEN STANLEY RANGE 245
-
- UNKNOWN SPECIES DISCOVERED BY THE AUTHOR 251
-
- THE AUTHOR AND SOME NATIVE COLLECTORS 255
-
- A SPIDER’S WEB FISHING-NET 263
-
- FISHING WITH SPIDERS’ WEB NETS 269
-
- A WEIRD TRIBAL DANCE 275
-
- A SEA-COAST SCENE 283
-
- HANUABADA WOMEN WEARING THE RAMI 293
-
- BUYING A WIFE 299
-
- NEW GUINEA WEAPONS AND IMPLEMENTS 305
-
- YOUNG NATIVES AND WOMEN CARRIERS 313
-
- SMOKING THE BAU-BAU 319
-
- A NEW GUINEA HUNT 327
-
- HAULING UP A LOG 337
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER I
- _BREAKING THE GROUND_
-
-The Author’s many Journeys—New Guinea more interesting than all—The
-Second Largest Island in the World, and the last to guard its Secrets
-from Man—Its Vast Possibilities to the Trader and the Man of Science—
-Great Riches in Birds and Insects—770 known Species of Birds—The People—
-Their many Dialects—A Geographical Reason for this—Toilsome Travel—
-Razor-like Ridges in Endless Succession—The Author’s Camps—Journeys
-Outlined—In Unexplored Country—Gorgeous Scenery—Variations of
-Temperature—The Chief Bugbear, Transport.
-
-
-
-
- TWO YEARS AMONG NEW GUINEA CANNIBALS
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER I
- BREAKING THE GROUND
-
-
-In the course of thirty years of almost continuous journeyings in both
-hemispheres, it has been my fortune to stray far from the beaten tracks
-and to know something of the spell and mystery of the earth’s solitudes.
-My work in quest of additions to the great natural history collections,
-both public and private, of England, and to a less extent of France, has
-led me to the Rocky Mountains, the Amazons, the Republic of Colombia,
-the Yangtse gorges, and the snows of Tibet; but it is safe to say that
-none of these has aroused my interest and curiosity in so great a degree
-as the scene of my latest and my next expedition, the still almost
-unexplored Papua, second largest of the world’s islands, and almost the
-last to guard its secrets from the geographer, the naturalist, and the
-anthropologist.
-
-Fifty years ago, schoolboys, looking at their map of Africa, blessed the
-Dark Continent for an easy place to learn. A few names fringed the
-coast: inland nearly all was comprehended under the cheerful word
-“unexplored.” Such in great measure is the case with New Guinea to-day.
-Its 300,000 square miles of territory, held by Great Britain, Germany,
-and the Netherlands, and now lying fallow, are destined in the course of
-the next half-century to enrich the worlds of commerce and of science to
-a degree that may to some extent be forecast by what is already known of
-very restricted areas. What New Guinea may become to the trader is
-outlined later in the present volume, merely, be it noted, from the
-outside observer’s point of view, but this of course has in it a large
-measure of uncertainty, contingent on conditions of
-
- “Labour and the changing mart and all the framework of the land.”
-
-Be this as it may, one thing remains sure, the extraordinary value of
-Papua to the man of science, particularly to the entomologist and the
-ornithologist. In the department of ornithology alone, we already know
-of 770 different species of birds inhabiting the mainland and the
-islands, which places it in this respect far above Australia, which,
-with a superficial area nine times greater, possesses less than 500
-species in all.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- LAKATOIS PREPARING TO SAIL.
-]
-
-The ethnologist, too, has in Papua a happy hunting ground; for the
-tribes on the fringe of exploration present wonderful varieties of type,
-and as the mountain fastnesses of the interior are gradually opened up,
-there can be no doubt that rich material for the propounding of new
-problems and perhaps the solution of old ones will come to light.
-Language is curiously diversified: here you meet a tribe with a distinct
-speech, and camping near them for a time you learn the common currency
-of their tongue; a few miles further on appears another people, perhaps
-not greatly differing in type, but with another language altogether.
-Thus at Dinawa, where we were encamped for five months on the foot-hills
-of the Owen Stanley range, the native phrase for “Make up the fire” was
-“Aloba di”; while at Foula, only eighteen miles away as the crow flies,
-but far further on foot, the phrase ran “Aukida pute.” It is in the
-statement “far further on foot,” of course, that the main reason of this
-linguistic variation is chiefly to be found; for travel in the Papuan
-highlands is extraordinarily toilsome, owing to the exceeding abruptness
-of the configuration, and the endless succession of almost razor-like
-ridges. Thus the tribes are confined to narrow areas. Long rough ascents
-and descents and devious windings are the portion of the wayfarer who
-wishes to reach some spot that may even be visible from his last
-halting-place. This experience, and our entire dependence on native
-carriers to transport our heavy baggage, with the various _contretemps_
-and difficulties besetting the conduct of such a caravan, tempted me at
-one time to call this book “Ups and Downs in Papua,” as being at once
-literally and metaphorically true and descriptive.
-
-Despite the difficulty of migration, however, it is certain that had our
-mission been one of exploration pure and simple we could, during our two
-years’ sojourn, have traversed a far more extensive region than we did.
-But our first concern was the examination of the butterflies, moths, and
-birds of the Owen Stanley range, and that within particular and somewhat
-restricted areas, so that our work necessitated encamping sometimes for
-months at a time at one particular spot, in order that the collection
-and preservation of our specimens might be carried on under the most
-advantageous conditions possible in such a wilderness. To this end we
-built two permanent camps, one at Dinawa, and the other at Ekeikei, at
-altitudes of 3600 and 1500 feet respectively. From these bases we made
-short expeditions in various directions, and established temporary camps
-on the St. Joseph River, Mount Kebea, and finally at Mafalu, our highest
-point of attainment, 6000 feet above the level of the sea among the
-fastnesses of the Owen Stanley range. But even that altitude is
-comparatively insignificant in the magnificent highlands of Papua. The
-higher we rose it was only to catch sight of still loftier ranges that
-piled peak on peak as far as the eye could reach. The only one of these
-that has as yet been trodden by the white man is Mount Victoria, which
-rises to a height of 13,000 feet. This was made the objective of a
-special expedition by Sir William Macgregor, who recently crossed
-British New Guinea, a journey which took him fifty-one days to
-accomplish. Sir William has also explored the Fly River tentatively, and
-D’Albertis followed its course for 600 or 700 miles; but when these
-achievements are mentioned, one has exhausted nearly all the serious
-efforts that have been made in Papuan exploration. Within the last year
-the Netherlands officials have issued a map that makes many valuable
-additions to our knowledge of the topography of the coast-line of their
-territory.
-
-It may make for clearness in following my journeys if the reader will at
-this point submit for a moment to the drudgery of a brief examination of
-the map, for my trail exhibits various doublings backwards and forwards,
-and consequently exposes the narrative to the risk of confusion, unless
-the main outline of the itinerary be followed. It had been my intention
-to work first in Dutch New Guinea, but various accidents, and the
-hostility of a warlike tribe, brought these plans to an untimely end,
-and I had to spend the greater part of my time within the borders of the
-British possession. Port Moresby, the British Government station,
-consequently became my main base of operations, and it was in a
-north-westerly and south-easterly direction from that settlement that my
-journeyings lay. On the first of these I went by sea from Port Moresby
-north-west to Yule Island, separated from the mainland by Hall Sound,
-and then I struck up the Ethel River as far as Oo-fa-fa, where we began
-our march into the interior. The chief points of the route as noted on
-the map were Epa and Ekeikei, Madui, and then on to Dinawa, where we
-established our first camp, and settled down for five months’ work,
-which included a short expedition to the St. Joseph River. Returning to
-Port Moresby, and having some time to spare, I and my son went down the
-coast 75 miles to the south-east, partly on foot, partly by boat, by way
-of Tupeselae, Kappa-kappa, Kalo, and Kerapuna, as far as Hood’s Bay, a
-journey rather of observation than of exploration, for the region is
-within the sphere of missionary enterprise, and cannot be regarded as
-altogether unknown, although the geographer has not yet by any means had
-his last word upon it. Reaching Port Moresby by a reversal of the same
-route, we returned once more to Yule Island, and struck inland by way of
-Mekeo and Epa to Ekeikei, where we built our second and most elaborate
-camp, which served us as the base for our furthest journey to Mount
-Kebea, and thence inland by way of Googoolee, Cooloo-coolu, Babooni,
-Amana, Foula, and Avola, to Mafalu, our highest point.
-
-It may be worth while noting that as soon as we had passed Bioto Creek
-on the Ethel River, existing maps ceased to be of use to us, and with
-the exception of a few vaguely indicated mountains, presented a complete
-blank. Such outlines of topography as we have filled in give in every
-case the native name of the place. The fashion of rechristening
-localities, although often complimentary to European explorers and their
-friends, pastors, masters, and disciples, and probably commemorative of
-a discovery, seems to me always to sever an interesting link with the
-country under examination. For this reason I prefer the melodious native
-name Papua to its western supplanter New Guinea.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- A FEATHERED ARTIST, THE BOWER-BIRD, WITH HIS HOUSE AND GARDEN.
-
- He distinguishes between colours, lays out his garden in alternate
- rows of white and mauve flowers.
-]
-
-Our chief movements inland may comprehensively be taken to lie within a
-region bounded by a radius of 50 miles around Delana on Hall Sound. On
-entering the unexplored region we found ourselves at first in a flat,
-swampy country, intersected by a few tiny creeks, some not more than two
-feet wide, running through grass. We next passed the eucalyptus belt and
-then came the forest proper, in which the trees were at first set in
-isolated patches. Undergrowth there was, but it did not attain any
-density, and at intervals we could trace the trails of the sandalwood
-cutter. Not long after leaving Oo-fa-fa we found a rocky eminence, from
-which we enjoyed a lovely view of the entire Bioto Creek winding between
-a dense border of mangroves, the vivid green of which marked the course
-of the inlet, even when the shimmer of the water in the sunlight was
-entirely veiled by the overhanging vegetation. Beyond lay the broader
-waters of Hall Sound, bounded by the wooded shores of Yule Island, and
-to the west we could descry Nicora, a small village on a hill of red
-clay. The vista was closed by the sea, and in the clear atmosphere the
-picture was one to be remembered. We then entered a flat tract, an
-apparent plateau, at a height of 1000 feet, and for a time travelling
-was over comparatively easy ground, but at Epa the forest and our
-difficulties began in earnest. Henceforward we had to depend on one or
-two trails very difficult to follow, and hills and valleys became
-continuous. Fifteen miles inland lay before us a line of rugged peaks,
-whither we were bound, but many more miles than fifteen would have to be
-covered before we reached them. Further off still towered Mount Yule,
-our first glimpse of the Papuan Alps. Passing Ekeikei we entered the
-region of ridges, often scarcely twelve inches wide, and affording only
-the most precarious foothold. The path as we rose became still more
-rugged, and was crossed by numerous creeks. Then the character of the
-forest changed, and we traversed damp and gloomy tracts, where the thick
-vegetation excluded the sunlight. The track at this point skirted vast
-and threatening precipices. At Madui we encountered peaty and spongy
-ground, thickly interwoven with roots, which impeded our progress and
-made the advance peculiarly toilsome, and the last stage to Dinawa was a
-long dip and a longer ascent. Once there, however, we were rewarded by a
-delightfully bracing climate and a glorious panorama of mountain
-scenery, a delight we often longed for at Mafalu, our furthest and
-highest point, where all view, save through an opening we ourselves cut
-in the trees, was denied us. Even that was generally obscured, so
-incessant was the rain and wetting mist. At favourable moments, however,
-we would see through our clearing the sunlight in the valley far below
-us, although we ourselves, dwelling as we did among the clouds, were
-denied that boon.
-
-Such then, in brief outline, were the changes of scenery through which
-we passed. The alternations of climate were not less varied. In Dutch
-New Guinea it was very hot and humid, often 150° F. in the sun and 110°
-in the shade. On “cool” nights we had temperatures varying from 75° to
-80°. At Port Moresby 160° was no uncommon temperature, and this was
-rendered worse by the lack of shade and the stony, arid country. The
-great heat begins to be felt about 11 A.M., and lasts until 3 P.M.
-during the season of the N.W. monsoon. The atmosphere is, however,
-fairly dry at times, and the highest temperature is not nearly so
-unendurable as I have found 90° in the shade at Manaos, at the
-confluence of the Amazon and the Rio Negro, where the air is saturated,
-and one sits mopping oneself continually and praying for sunset,
-although even that brings but slight relief. This never happens at Port
-Moresby, where there is sometimes a pleasantly cool evening. Towards
-nightfall the S.E. monsoon dies away, and the same holds good for Yule
-Island and Hood’s Bay. For some distance inland these conditions
-prevail, but after Ekeikei (1500 feet) there is a decided change.
-Considerable humidity prevails in the forest, and although at midday the
-heat is scarcely less oppressive than on the coast, yet the traveller is
-sustained by the prospect of relief, for the evenings are deliciously
-cool. The average day, too, was not unbearably hot at these higher
-altitudes. In the neighbourhood of the Deeanay precipice, owing to the
-dense forest and the plentiful streams, it is quite cool all day, and at
-Dinawa (3600 feet), although we have recorded noon temperatures of 120°
-in the sun, the average at 4 A.M. was from 63° to 65°. Winds were
-infrequent, but at night there was a brief land breeze from the higher
-mountains.
-
-On the Kebea the climatic conditions are very similar, but there is more
-mist, and in the morning the valleys are filled with great masses of
-white rolling cloud, which rise and disappear as the sun gains power.
-These vapours sometimes assume a perfectly level surface, so that they
-resemble an ocean or a vast plain of snow, through which the higher
-peaks rise like islands. At Mafalu the average temperature was down to
-59° F. at nights, and highest in day 80° under the leafage of the
-forest, and mist and rain were almost continual from 11 A.M. to 3 P.M.
-As the sun sank the heavens would clear, and the mist floated past in
-thin wreaths, or lay still in long, ghostly trails if no wind blew. The
-nights were often cold, and these altered conditions were not without
-their visible effect on animated nature, for at Mafalu the insects
-changed, and we secured a fine selection of Lepidoptera we had not met
-with before.
-
-This brief sketch of the configuration and conditions of the country
-through which we travelled may, I trust, serve as a key to the more
-detailed account of our journey, and with the directions and altitudes
-thus succinctly placed before him, the reader may possibly find it
-easier to follow us up hill and down dale. There is one more point I
-would venture to impress upon him, a point which will recur again and
-again—he may fancy _ad nauseam_—the difficulties of transport in Papua.
-But that was the main crux of our experience, and its importance can
-hardly be realised by one who has not undergone similar troubles. You
-are entirely in the hands of the natives, without whom you cannot stir a
-foot. All your impedimenta, your food, stores, scientific implements,
-and “trade” (material for barter, the equivalent of ready money) must go
-on the backs of your cannibal friends, a people without organisation,
-who are hard to collect and hard to persuade to follow you. It is
-necessary to rely on yourself to secure followers, though here and there
-a chief may aid you. One such, the greatest “character” we encountered
-in Papua, will be introduced to the reader at the proper place. On the
-march continual apprehension besets the traveller lest his carriers
-bolt, for if this happened in the interior he would be done for, and he
-would have a terrible business to get out of the country, if indeed he
-got out at all. Hence the reason why I have dwelt on our perpetually
-recurring difficulties with carriers, for the natives were veritably our
-staff and scrip; and had these failed us at a crucial moment, our
-expedition would have broken down utterly, to the great loss of those
-who had risked much on the undertaking.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- GUARDING THE WORKERS.
-
- Cultivated ground is generally some distance from the villages. It is
- tilled by young women, who are guarded by young natives armed with
- spears.
-]
-
-On the commission of several friends, all scientific enthusiasts, whom I
-have named elsewhere, I and my son Harry, a lad of sixteen, left England
-in January 1901, and sailed eastward on board the _Duke of Sutherland_
-to Thursday Island, whence we proceeded on board the Netherlands gunboat
-_Neas_ to Dutch New Guinea. My brief stay there, and the disappointments
-that led to my seeking a different field of operations, form the subject
-of the following chapter.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER II
- _DISAPPOINTMENTS IN DUTCH NEW GUINEA_
-
-Dutch New Guinea—The Coast—Unsavoury Mud-banks—Merauke—The Dutch
-Settlement described—Its Wonderful Modernity—A Fierce Tribe, the Tugeri,
-now described for the First Time—Their Appearance and Habits—Their
-Continual Murderous Raids—The Fearful Bamboo Knife—Scientific Work here
-impossible owing to Danger of going beyond Settlement Boundaries—
-Outbreak of a Mysterious Disease at Merauke—Its Swift Deadliness—The
-Symptoms—Determine to leave Dutch New Guinea and prepare for a March
-into the Unexplored Interior.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER II
- DISAPPOINTMENTS IN DUTCH NEW GUINEA
-
-
-As we approached the shores of Dutch New Guinea, we first descried
-low-lying tracts of marshy land. To the water’s edge came tall trees
-loaded with orchids of the most brilliant hues and of many varieties,
-notably the Dendrobium. The mangrove swamps, elsewhere so common in New
-Guinea, were here entirely absent. Under the trees, close even to the
-water’s brink, could be seen a dense tangled undergrowth. There was no
-beach, only muddy shores. At low tide the water recedes, probably for a
-quarter of a mile, leaving hard mud flats capable of sustaining men
-bare-foot. During the winter monsoon a heavy surf would break on these
-flats, but we arrived in fine weather, and the water was perfectly calm.
-
-Of course, the _Neas_ could not go inshore, but had to stand off to a
-distance of at least ten miles, and we had to land by the boat. A
-prominent feature of the landscape was a great spreading tree, which the
-Dutch sailors had taken as their chief bearing for finding the mouth of
-the Merauke River. Had the hostile natives only known how the access to
-their jealously guarded territory depended upon that one landmark, it
-would certainly not have been allowed to stand long. These
-characteristic shores fringe the mouth of the Merauke River, which
-empties itself through a small estuary about three times as wide as the
-Thames at Greenwich. It is navigable for about six miles, and at the
-furthest end it so narrows that the vessel could be put about only by a
-clever manœuvre, during which her bow and stern all but touched the
-banks. With a small survey boat, however, such as the _Neas_, drawing
-from 10 to 12 feet of water, the river may be navigated for about 160
-miles. From larger vessels lying in the river off the new Dutch
-settlement of Merauke, which was our point of arrival, it was usual to
-land in a small dinghy.
-
-A row of a few yards brought us to a primitive staging, built on piles,
-supporting a floating platform of logs, very slippery with the slime
-left by the river at high tide. These treacherous logs were far enough
-apart to permit of a man’s slipping easily between them into the
-unsavoury stream. Unsavoury indeed it was, for the waters of the Merauke
-are blue with a greasy alluvial deposit, closely resembling the “blue
-slipper” so well known to geologists in the Isle of Wight. The Dutch
-Settlement lay close to the landing-stage. It presented a rough
-collection of houses and barracks for the Netherlands troops. The
-largest building was the barracks, a fairly well-built structure of
-wood, capable of accommodating all the Dutch troops, a force of about
-150. The house of Mr. Kroesen, who was at that time the Resident, was
-quite an attractive building, with a glass roof and thin bamboo walls
-hung with a few curtains. It contained ten apartments, all on the ground
-floor. Next in importance was the house of the Comptroller, Mr. Schadee,
-which had only one apartment, with a large projecting roof and a fine
-verandah, under which the Comptroller entertained his friends. A little
-distance away were the open sleeping sheds of the Javanese convicts who
-had been brought there to build the Settlement and to drain the marsh.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- CURIOUS DRUMS OF THE TUGERI (DUTCH NEW GUINEA).
-
- The body of the drum is cut and hollowed from a solid trunk, and
- curiously carved. The drumheads are of lizard skin.
-]
-
-It is curious that the Dutch always choose low-lying spots for their
-settlements. Some instinct of home seems to draw them to the flat lands,
-and better sites at a loftier elevation are neglected. Merauke, however,
-was chosen for another reason. The Dutch had been good enough to make
-their Settlement here to prevent the Tugeri from making raids on to the
-British territory. The thoroughness of the Dutch character, however,
-appears in the equipment of their station. When I arrived at Merauke the
-Settlement was only two months old, but it was already furnished with
-every accessory of civilisation, even including iron lamp-posts from
-Europe. It offered, in this respect, a striking contrast to the old
-British Settlement of Port Moresby. Merauke was built in a forest
-clearing, and the Dutch had already laid out gardens after the
-Netherlands pattern, and were raising vegetables in the coffee-coloured
-soil—the result of centuries of alluvial deposit—a soil so rich and
-productive that beans may be gathered three weeks after being sown. The
-gardening is carried on entirely by the civilians, the officers and men
-confining themselves exclusively to their military duties. As the
-Settlement had been established in the centre of a dangerous and
-turbulent district, it was protected with barbed wire defences and with
-a ring of block-houses on the landward side. The state of unrest then
-prevailing prevented me from carrying on my scientific work. I had come
-to Merauke to explore and collect in new territory, but the
-long-standing difficulty with the warlike Tugeri tribe was still acute,
-and the very day after I landed we had abundant proof of how unwise it
-would be to penetrate into the interior. On that day three or four
-Javanese convicts who were working on the edge of the clearing were
-heard to shout as though in distress. In five minutes an armed guard was
-on the spot, but all the convicts were found decapitated by the
-head-hunting Tugeri. The heads had been taken off with the bamboo knife
-so cleverly, that the doctor on board our ship told me that no surgeon
-with the latest surgical instruments could have removed so many heads in
-so short a time.
-
-This bamboo knife of the Tugeri is a very remarkable weapon. It is
-simply a piece of cane stripped off from the parent stem, leaving a
-natural edge as keen as the finest tempered steel.
-
-Nor was this the only outrage. A Chinese woman had died, and had been
-buried in the graveyard near the Settlement. The next morning the grave
-was found to have been violated, the head taken, and all the clothing
-removed. The Tugeri never showed themselves all this time, but it was
-known that they were watching Merauke from the dense screen of
-undergrowth which came down to the edge of the clearing.
-
-British settlers on the western boundary of British New Guinea have for
-a long time been harassed by Tugeri raiders from the Dutch side, and the
-Lieutenant-Governor’s report for 1899–1900 contains an exhaustive
-account of the negotiations between the British and Dutch authorities
-for the suppression of these outrages and the indemnification of
-sufferers. In 1896 Sir William Macgregor undertook a punitive expedition
-against the Tugeri, and at the time believed that he had finally driven
-them out of British territory; but during a murderous raid on the Sanana
-tribe, shortly before 1900, many persons were killed and carried away.
-The chief result of the negotiations, apart from the settlement of
-indemnity and the undertaking of search for missing persons, was the
-Dutch decision to appoint a resident official for that part of their
-territory which adjoins the British possessions. Hence the establishment
-of the Merauke Settlement, and the appointment of Mr. Kroesen to take
-charge of it. The Netherlands Government has guaranteed a special sum
-for the administration of Merauke, and the Dutch officers there have
-also been authorised to correspond directly with the British officers in
-the western division on matters requiring their mutual attention,
-instead of, as the Blue Book says, “by the circumlocutory channels of
-their respective Governments.”
-
-My opportunities for observing the Tugeri were, therefore, necessarily
-limited, but I am, I believe, the first person who has made any study of
-this remarkable tribe, and, as far as I am aware, they have remained
-hitherto undescribed. They are a very numerous people, inhabiting a
-tract of country extending as far west as the Marianne Strait, and as
-far east as the Fly River at longitude 141°. Inland their boundaries are
-unknown, but it is probable that they extend a considerable distance
-from the coast. They are known to have co-terminous boundaries with the
-Kewi people, from whom the British draw their police, and who are first
-found at the mouth of the Fly River.
-
-The first to visit the Tugeri was a renegade missionary, who had
-absconded with some of the mission funds. He came upon the tribe by
-accident. They captured him, took away his boat, his clothes, and all
-that he possessed. Curiously enough they did not kill him, but gave him
-a house and food. He stayed with them on very friendly terms for about
-six months, and was at length taken off by a schooner which chanced to
-touch on the coast.
-
-The second white man who observed them was Captain Pym, who is said to
-have been the discoverer of the Merauke River, and who was certainly one
-of the first traders there.
-
-The Tugeri are a fine race, very fierce, and absolutely unspoiled by
-European vices. The men stand about 5 feet 8 inches on an average, and
-are clean-limbed, powerful fellows, capable of any amount of endurance.
-As a race, they are broad-shouldered, sinewy, and of enormous strength.
-No European can draw their bow. This weapon is made of a longitudinal
-section of the bamboo. Near the grip the diameter is about 3½ inches,
-and the wood tapers at each end to a diameter of ¾–inch. The string is
-of twisted fibre, and the arrow, which is made of a reed, carries to a
-distance of at least 300 yards. Like all savages, they are admirable
-marksmen.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- THE NATIVE METHOD OF TREE CLIMBING.
-]
-
-In the typical Merauke Tugeri the head is rather conical, and the
-forehead high but receding. The hair is sparse, beginning well up on the
-cranium, and falling in long strands to the middle of the back beyond
-the shoulder blades. The hair is plaited with grass and string, and from
-the plait at the back rises a single osprey feather. The eyebrows are
-straight and meeting, the eyes black, large, and heavy. The nose is
-broad and flat, but with a prominent bridge, the mouth degraded and
-fatuous, but the lips neither so thick nor so protruding as the negro’s.
-The ears lie fairly flat to the head, and are not abnormally large. The
-men wear an enormous ear ornament of bamboo bent into an open ring.
-Round the periphery of this ring the flesh of the lobe of the ear,
-previously perforated, is stretched in infancy, and as the individual
-grows the natural spring of the bamboo stretches the flesh more and
-more, until in manhood a loop is formed big enough to hold a ring of at
-least 4 inches in diameter. It is extraordinary how the tribesmen
-contrive to move amidst the tangled forest without hindrance from this
-abnormal expansion of the lobe, the most unusual flesh decoration to be
-found amongst mankind. When the bamboo is out the loop hangs like a long
-pendant, a perfect skein of flesh, a peculiarly hideous accessory of
-savage adornment. Some of the Tugeri wear an apology for a beard, or
-rather two scraggy tufts of hair depending from each side of the chin.
-The use of pomatum in any form is unknown. The teeth are strong and
-fairly regular, but perfectly brown, owing to the habit of chewing the
-betel-nut.
-
-For personal adornment the Tugeri wear two crossed straps of dogs’ teeth
-strung together with grass. Each strap is about 3 inches wide, and is
-formed of nine parallel rows of teeth. The strap that rests on the left
-shoulder passes under the right armpit; that over the right shoulder
-passes outside the left arm above the elbow. The straps are lightly
-fastened at the point where they cross the breast. Round the right arm,
-just above the elbow, they wear a curious armlet. In the case of the
-richer tribesmen this is of shell, decorated with grass, or of grass
-decorated with shell. The breadth is from 5 to 6 inches. On the stomach
-to the right are two or three horizontal scars made by cutting or
-burning. These are self-inflicted for superstitious reasons. The lower
-part of the stomach is tightly drawn in (often extremely tight) with a
-coil of finely plaited fibre. This seems to be worn for elegance alone,
-and tight-lacing is a ruling fashion among the Tugeri dandies: the
-tighter the lacing the greater the dandy. From fifteen to sixteen years
-of age the young men are hopeless victims to fashion. The Tugeri go
-bare-foot, but wear grass anklets adorned with shells, which rattle like
-castanets as they walk. I observed, however, no dances, although these,
-I understand, are performed in their villages. For decency’s sake they
-wear a shell after the manner of the statuesque fig-leaf, and their
-costume is completed by a necklace of dogs’ teeth and small pieces of
-bone, such treasures as a savage prizes.
-
-Despite the natural ferocity of the Tugeri, the tribe is not without
-some rudimentary notions of courtesy, and they paid the Dutch on their
-arrival a similar compliment to that paid to Captain Cook, that is to
-say, they were good enough to offer to provide wives for the sailors
-from among their own women. Certain traders in British New Guinea are
-not above accepting this civility, for the possession of a native woman
-is often a valuable business asset. Some sandalwood cutters, for
-example, frequently make these left-handed marriages, for the mistress
-is influential in obtaining workers for her husband from among her own
-people. One sandalwood cutter, a Malay, who has made a large fortune at
-his trade, could always obtain double the number of labourers procurable
-by any other trader on account of his _liaison_ with a native woman, by
-whom he has a large family. His numerous Papuan blood-relations stand
-him in good stead in his business.
-
-The houses of the Tugeri are built of grass and bamboo. The walls rise
-to a height of about ten feet and are covered with a span roof. I
-observed their villages only from a distance, however, and never
-accompanied the Dutch soldiers on any of their expeditions. Some of the
-villages are very large, consisting of two or three hundred houses. Near
-the townships immense cocoanut plantations invariably occur, and these
-seem to form the chief wealth of the Tugeri.
-
-A strange part of the Tugeri’s paraphernalia was their extraordinary
-drums. The body of these, shaped like a dice-box, was hewn out of a
-solid log, hollowed, and curiously carved. Midway at the narrowest point
-was a clumsy handle, also hewn from the log. The drum heads are of
-lizard skin. The performer carries the instrument by the handle in the
-left hand, and beats with his right. The noise is prodigious.
-
-The tribe domesticates the gaura. This bird has frequently been
-described by naturalists, but a short account of it may not be
-inopportune here, as I was fortunate in obtaining many good specimens of
-it. The gaura is half as large again as the guinea-fowl, and weighs from
-five to ten pounds. The beak is longer than that of the ordinary pigeon,
-but is not large in proportion to the bird. It has the ordinary
-characteristics of the pigeon beak. The head is small, the neck short,
-the body full and fleshy, and remarkably fine eating. The back is broad
-and rounded, the legs brightish red and characteristically those of the
-pigeon breed. The plumage of the head is a bluish silver grey with a
-fine crest of a lighter shade. The crest feathers are very open in their
-branching. When erected, the crest spreads out like a fan and makes a
-noble display. The breast feathers are a rich maroon, the wings and back
-a bluish slate colour. There are white patches on the wings, which are
-tipped with maroon. The tail feathers continue the shade of the back
-until within two inches of the extremity, when they are graduated into a
-lovely grey, almost matching that of the crest. For all its fine looks
-it is a silly bird, short and heavy of flight, and easily killed when
-once found. The sportsman locates the gaura by its booming sound.
-
-My ten days’ stay at Merauke was a time of strange misfortune, and while
-there I had the unenviable opportunity of observing a very serious
-outbreak of a mysterious disease, which was said to be that deadly
-beri-beri, which has lately been occupying the minds of men of science.
-For some time there had been isolated cases among the Javanese convicts,
-but about the second week in April the Dutch authorities became greatly
-alarmed by the spread of the disease. Cases were reported daily, and all
-proved fatal. At last the deaths reached the terrible figure of 160 in
-ten days. The victims were all Javanese, the officials and natives went
-unscathed. The doctors of the Dutch Colony were very able men, but no
-relief could be given to the patient beyond administering anæsthetics. I
-question whether it was rightly styled beri-beri, for in South America,
-at Manaos on the Rio Negro, I have seen cases of the disease among the
-Portuguese rubber gatherers, but these bore no resemblance to the
-sickness at Merauke. The sufferers in South America were generally men
-who led isolated lives in the vast forests of the Amazons, gathering the
-sap of the _hevea braziliensis_, and living for long periods on bad
-food. Victims of this type of beri-beri generally live for nine months,
-and those of strong constitution and in whom the swelling had not risen
-above the knees recovered. If the patient lives the old life and
-continues the old diet in the forest, the disease gradually ascends
-until it gets above the knees, and then its course becomes very rapid
-until it reaches the heart.
-
-I myself caught beri-beri on the Rio Branco, and first noted its
-presence by the discovery of a numb spot about the size of a halfpenny
-on each ankle. The Brazilian medical men assured me that nowhere in
-South America could I hope to get better, and I was ordered to quit the
-country at once. Before I reached Havre the numbness was greatly
-reduced, the affected patch being then the size of a farthing, and two
-months after I reached home, it vanished. In Columbia I have observed
-exactly the same form of the disease as on the Amazons.
-
-In Merauke, however, sufferers from the so-called beri-beri had no
-seizure of paralysis in the lower extremities. It was always in the
-abdomen, and was accompanied by the most excruciating agony. Death
-usually came in four hours. There was no relief from pain; the
-intestines seemed to be knotted, the patients face was pale and
-agonised. He continually moaned, strained forward and doubled his body.
-He held his stomach with both hands, and occasionally lay down and
-rolled, and as the end approached, the intestines seemed to be forced
-upwards towards the thorax, and there was great swelling. The doctors
-tried poultices and fomentations in vain. They also administered castor
-oil without affording any alleviation of the suffering. Perfect
-consciousness remained until the very end, and the last thing the
-patient always asked for was fruit. Five minutes after making this
-request, he was dead.
-
-One evening we spent with Mr. Schadee on his verandah, there was with us
-his Javanese clerk (not a convict), who was enjoying his cigarette and
-apparently in the best of health. The next morning he was dead. Our
-carpenter on board the _Van Doorn_ was carried off with equal
-suddenness, and he, curiously enough, had never been on shore all the
-time of the epidemic. The victims were always buried within five hours.
-As to the communication of infection, it is doubtful whether the disease
-was due in each case to external causes, or whether once having broken
-out it spread from man to man. The bad rice,[1] on which the Javanese
-live, may have been the cause. At the same time it may be noted, that
-the convicts were working in the abominable blue mud of the river.
-Another article of diet supplied to the Javanese was dried fish, very
-ill cured, or rather not cured at all, and most offensive to European
-nostrils.
-
-Footnote 1:
-
- Since these lines were written an eminent medical man, a specialist on
- beri-beri, has publicly advanced this view.—E. A. P.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- A LAKATOI (SAILING RAFT OF CANOES) AT ANCHOR AND A DWELLING-HOUSE
- BUILT OVER THE WATER.
-]
-
-The epidemic was very costly to the Netherlands Government. The _Van
-Swoll_, a Dutch merchantman, laden with the necessary plant for
-establishing a settlement, was at that time lying at Merauke. After the
-beri-beri broke out, there was no labour available to unload the vessel.
-Mr. Kroesen accordingly decided to ship the surviving convicts on board
-the _Van Swoll_, and send her back to Amboina. There she placed the
-convicts in a sanatorium, and went on to Timor to procure a fresh batch
-of convicts, who were to return with her to Merauke and unload her. The
-delay to the _Van Swoll_ alone cost the Dutch Government 800 guilders a
-day.
-
-No doubt a settlement in a low miasmatic country is in itself
-unfavourable, but I am inclined to attribute the disease to bad diet.
-This so-called beri-beri occurs also in the native princes’ prisons in
-India, where the food is very bad. I am disposed to believe that the
-Javanese were rendered liable to attack, because their blood had been
-impoverished by several years of poor feeding before they came to
-Merauke, and that the climate and worse food than they had had in Java
-made them ready to receive the germs of the disease.
-
-Such was my visit to Dutch New Guinea. The hostility of the Tugeri and
-the prevalence of disease rendered scientific work out of the question,
-and accordingly after ten days I returned to Port Moresby, there to
-secure means of transport for an expedition into the interior of British
-New Guinea, where I proposed to continue my studies of the Lepidoptera
-peculiar to that region.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER III
- _CHANGES AND STRANGE SCENES_
-
-We sail to Thursday Island—A Rough Voyage in a Cattle-boat—A Glimpse of
-Thursday Island—The Wonderful Colour of its Waters—We reach Port
-Moresby—Contrast to the Scenery of Dutch New Guinea—Magnificent
-Mountains—Evidences of Drought—Vegetation burnt up—The British
-Government Post of Port Moresby described—A Good Second to Hades or
-Aden—The Great Sight of Port Moresby—A Community of Hereditary Potters—
-The Pottery Trading Fleet—The Strange Vessels called Lakatois—Their
-Structure—Native Orgies before the Expedition starts—A New Guinea Ballet
-on Deck—Seclusion of Women after the Young Braves depart with the Fleet—
-My Inland Expedition fitted out—Official Courtesy—Details of Baggage—
-Transport procured after Immense Trouble.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER III
- CHANGES AND STRANGE SCENES
-
-
-While I lay at Merauke on board the _Van Doorn_, the steamship _Moresby_
-was signalled. On this I obtained a passage to Port Moresby, the seat of
-government in British New Guinea, so I accordingly bade farewell to
-Captain De Jong of the _Van Doorn_, and in due course we weighed anchor
-for Thursday Island, at which the steamer was to touch on her voyage.
-The _Moresby_ could not approach Merauke nearer than twelve miles, so we
-went out to her on a small petrol launch. There happened to be a
-tremendous swell on at the time, and when we came alongside the
-_Moresby_ we found that the deck of the launch was often ten feet from
-the companion, and we had to watch our opportunity to get on board. It
-was quite half-an-hour before we succeeded.
-
-We found our steamer by no means attractive. She was most unsavoury on
-account of the cattle carried for the ship’s use. The cabins were below
-and very hot, for the vessel had been built for a cool climate, and was
-not at all suited for tropical trade. She was an ordinary cargo boat,
-and could not usually steam faster than eight knots an hour.
-
-A run of twenty-four hours’ duration brought us to Thursday Island, one
-of the great centres of the pearl fishery, where many nationalities
-congregate for the purposes of trade. The stores are kept for the most
-part by Chinese, and Japanese and Chinese boats call there on their way
-south to Sydney. The coasters also make it a point of call as they pass
-from Brisbane and Sydney on their way to the Gulf of Carpentaria and
-Normanton, the great centre of the Eastern cattle trade.
-
-Thursday Island, so small a dot in the Eastern Archipelago that the
-tiniest mark a geographer can make on his map is widely out of
-proportion to its size, rewards the traveller well for a visit. Although
-one can walk round the island in an hour and a half, the locality is
-full of interest, and the pearl fishery is very engrossing for the
-observer. The boats of the fishing fleet afford a most picturesque
-accessory to the scene, and the harbour is full of life. Small boats
-dart about everywhere, and there is a continual coming and going. The
-large Chinese and Japanese steamers, of from 6000 to 7000 tons burden,
-are continually arriving at and leaving the Government wharf. The
-Europeans are most agreeable and hospitable. The sea round Thursday
-Island is a most wonderful colour—in parts emerald green and silver,
-deep blue varied with light yellow and brown, and everywhere perfectly
-clear. The tides, which at times flow with the rapidity of a mill-race,
-have been studied, but are not yet understood. They are tremendously
-erratic and very dangerous. Sometimes they run at the rate of seven
-miles an hour, and against this steamers can make no headway. The Torres
-Straits indeed, as far as Cairns, are the most dangerous seas in the
-world. It is, of course, very warm in Thursday Island, but the heat is
-tempered by the most delightful sea breezes. I could have enjoyed a
-longer stay than twenty-four hours, but that was the limit of our
-vessel’s call, and we left next day for Port Moresby, which we reached
-after a two days’ run.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- MY CINGALESE LIEUTENANT, SAM, AND HIS WIFE AT THEIR HOME IN PORT
- MORESBY.
-]
-
-As we approached the coast we found that it presented a very striking
-contrast to that of Dutch New Guinea. Here the mountains came close down
-to the coast, which was rock-bound, but not cut to sheer cliffs. Inland
-the mountain ranges ran parallel with the shore line, range towering
-above range, as far as the eye could see, the whole prospect dominated
-by the magnificent peak of Mount Victoria, which sprang aloft into the
-azure to a height of 13,121 feet. Viewed from the sea Mount Victoria
-appears to culminate in a plateau, but Sir William MacGregor declares
-that it is really a mass of peaks.
-
-As we drew nearer to the shore we noted unmistakable evidence of the
-drought, which had just set in, and which lasted for nine whole months.
-The vegetation was entirely brown, and everything seemed barren and
-burned up. The drought, it was said, extended as far west as the Fly
-River, at the 141st degree of longitude. Even at an altitude of 6000
-feet, as I found afterwards, lycopodiums, orchids, and parasites were
-falling off the trees, and this, too, within the zone of humidity for
-New Guinea.
-
-The approach to Port Moresby is dangerous owing to the reefs that
-encircle the coast, and accordingly great caution had to be used in
-navigating the ship into the harbour. The course lies east, then west
-along a certain known channel, and finally the navigator follows the
-coast for a few hours, when, rounding a promontory on his right, he
-catches his first glimpse of this anchorage. The Government post of Port
-Moresby, although picturesquely situated among rolling hills which slope
-down to the water’s edge, is in itself unpretentious enough—merely a
-collection of houses and offices of bare, galvanised iron,
-architecturally as insignificant as rabbit hutches. During the day the
-temperature resembles Hades or Aden, whichever may have the priority.
-Here the British official chooses to abide, although comfortable houses
-of sago, with thick grass thatch, cool on the hottest day, offering a
-delightful dwelling-place, might be had only a few miles distant. A
-paternal administration, however, prescribes galvanised iron, and there
-its servants swelter, patient and uncomplaining, after the manner of
-Britons.
-
-Clustered about the Government buildings are various other buildings—the
-jail, which more resembles a pleasure-ground, shipping offices, stores,
-and the hotel. On an elevation at the farther end of the bay stands
-Government House, a pleasantly situated bungalow raised off the ground
-on five-foot posts. The best building in the place, as one might expect,
-is the station of the London Missionary Society.
-
-Life at Port Moresby is not without its events, and one of the most
-noteworthy of its public spectacles, and one which I was fortunate
-enough to see on a subsequent visit, is the annual starting of the
-_lakatois_ or huge sailing rafts, laden with pottery for trade in the
-western part of the possession.
-
-Those who are familiar with the postage-stamp of British New Guinea
-must, no doubt, have often wondered what manner of strange craft is
-depicted thereon. The stamp, as will be seen from the accompanying
-illustration, bears the representation of a boat, or rather a raft,
-carrying two gigantic sails resembling the wings of some weird bird, and
-the whole appearance of the vessel is one that arouses curiosity. This
-is the _lakatoi_, the remarkable trading vessel of the hereditary
-potters of Hanuabada, a little village not far from Port Moresby. The
-hamlet, with its neighbour, Elevada, is built partly on land and partly
-on piles in the water; but while the land part of Hanuabada stands on
-the mainland, that part of Elevada which is not aquatic is founded on an
-island.
-
-The inhabitants belong to the Motu tribe, and their numbers do not
-exceed 800. Their long grass-thatched huts rise from sixteen to twenty
-feet above land or water, and each has its little landing-stage on a
-lower tier. The main poles supporting these structures are of rough-hewn
-tree trunks driven down into the soft sand. At a height of from five to
-six feet above the water the natural forks of the main poles are
-retained, and across these logs are laid, forming a rude platform.
-Ladders of very irregular construction give access almost at haphazard
-from stage to stage. Looking through the village below the houses, the
-eye encounters a perfect forest of poles, and between the dwellings in
-this queer Venice of the East run little waterways just wide enough to
-let a canoe pass along without grazing its outriggers. The houses
-themselves each contain only one living apartment.
-
-In and out among the houses ply the dug-out canoes, and a very charming
-feature of the village is its crowd of children, playing with toy
-_lakatois_. The smallest of these toy craft are made of a section of
-bamboo ballasted with stones, with a sail of the same shape as that of
-the great rafts used by the grown-up people. The bigger children,
-scorning the bamboo vessels, have a larger kind, in which the canoes are
-real little dug-outs. These youngsters are wonderful swimmers, and as
-they conduct their little regattas they jump about in the water,
-swimming and diving fearlessly, and enjoying the merriest possible time.
-The people of Hanuabada are an agreeable and rather comely race. They
-are typical south-east coast natives, with shock heads of black wiry
-hair. The women, who carry on the characteristic industry of the place,
-the work in earthenware, are lithe picturesque figures in their long
-_ramis_ or kilts of grass.
-
-It is a curious fact that, although the Hanuabada and Elevada people
-live actually on waters that teem with fish, they are poor fishermen,
-being, in fact, too lazy to follow that craft. They are accordingly
-helped in this industry by the Hula people, whose fishing fleet presents
-at night one of the most weirdly picturesque sights in Papua. Of this I
-have more to say in a later chapter.
-
-For weeks before the annual trading expedition Hanuabada is full of
-life. At every turn one comes upon women crouching on the ground,
-fashioning lumps of clay into the wonderfully perfect pottery for which
-the village is famous. The men-folk, although they do not condescend to
-take part in the actual fashioning of the pots, are good enough to dig
-the clay, which they take out of the ground with a stone adze—a flat
-stone blade lashed to the shorter extremity of a forked stick, the
-longer extremity forming the handle.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- HANUABADA GIRLS DANCING AND SINGING.
-
- Before the young braves sail on their annual pottery trading voyage,
- which they make on board Lakatois (sailing rafts of canoes), they
- have great rejoicing, and the young women dance on the decks of
- their strange-looking vessels.
-]
-
-There is a distinct organisation of labour among the potters, the women
-being divided into “makers” and “bakers.” Several “makers” work together
-in a group. They use no wheel, but seize a lump of clay with both hands,
-and make a hole large enough to get the right hand in, whereupon they
-gradually give the vessel its contour. After being roughly shaped, it is
-smoothed off with flat sticks or the palm of the hand. The finished
-article of Hanuabada ware is in the form of a flattened sphere with a
-very wide mouth, and a neatly finished rim six or eight inches across.
-Farther to the east, along the coast, the pottery is highly decorated,
-but it is much more crude in form, and has no fine rim. The pots are
-dried in the sun for several days, and then they are turned over to the
-“bakers,” whose fires are blazing in every street. There are two methods
-of baking. One is to lay the pot on a heap of hot ashes; the other to
-build the fire right round it. The vessel is watched through the whole
-process, and is continually turned on the fire with a little stick
-thrust into the mouth.
-
-When many hundreds of pots have been completed, the Hanuabada people
-begin to think about the disposal of their wares. Their great market is
-at Paruru, a long way up the coast. They barter their pottery for sago
-with the nations of that district, and it is very curious to note that
-this extensive trading organisation on the part of an utterly savage
-people has been in existence from time immemorial, and is no imitation
-of European methods. To reach Paruru the potters must undertake a
-perilous voyage, for which they are dependent on the tail of the
-south-east monsoon.
-
-Then comes the preparation of the craft, the _lakatois_. Several hundred
-large dug-out canoes are brought together, and are moored side by side
-at the landing stages in groups of six or ten. While this is being done
-many people are out in the forest cutting rattans and bamboos for
-lashing the dug-outs together, and for the upper framework of the rafts.
-Across the canoes, after they have been ranged at the proper distance
-(amidships, about six inches apart, although their taper ends cause a
-wider gap at bow and stern), are placed long bamboos, extending a
-considerable distance beyond the port and starboard sides of the
-outermost pair. Along the gunwales of each canoe, at regular intervals,
-stout bamboo uprights are erected, and to these the horizontal cross
-bamboos are strongly lashed with fibre and cane, until the whole
-framework is perfectly rigid. To the cross framework the potters fix
-down a floor of split bamboo, and all round the outer edges they wreathe
-dried grass to prevent slipping as one steps on board. This platform
-overlaps all round the raft fore and aft, and the cross-pieces are very
-strong and firmly lashed. Openings are left in the floor above each
-dug-out to enable the pottery to be stored in the holds of the canoes. A
-clear space is left on the platform, extending about six feet from bow
-and stern, and on the whole of the intervening space houses are erected
-in skeleton bamboo framework. These can be entirely covered in with mats
-to afford a shelter in stormy weather or in rain. The roofs as well as
-the sides are formed of mats. Wooden masts are now stepped amidships and
-held in place with stout stays of fibre, and then the _lakatoi_ is ready
-to receive its sails. These resemble vast kites, and were formerly made
-of native matting stretched upon an outer frame of bamboo, but are now
-made of calico. It is difficult to describe their form, and they can
-best be understood by a study of the accompanying illustration.
-
-Why the strange segment should be cut out of the upper part, leaving two
-great wings, I have never been able to discover. The sails of the
-_lakatoi_ are of themselves—things apart. Being stretched on a frame
-they cannot bulge, but swing like boards. Their points rest on the deck
-and work freely in a socket. The sails are hung lightly to the masts by
-braces, and there is no clewing up. In spite of their comparative
-rigidity they are quite manageable, and in case of sudden squalls can
-easily be let go. The _lakatoi_ is now ready for use—perhaps the most
-remarkable-looking craft that ever went to sea—and has only to be
-tested. From the rigging and the sails float long streamers of Papuan
-grass decorations, and the fleet of eight or ten _lakatois_ now lying
-off Hanuabada affords, as the sun strikes the brown sails, a really
-charming spectacle.
-
-Before they proceed to sea the careful people institute a trial trip,
-and celebrate a regatta with several days of extraordinary festivity.
-The fleet is sometimes augmented by some _lakatois_ from other villages.
-These sail up to Port Moresby from the east to join the main expedition.
-About eleven o’clock in the morning, if the wind be strong enough, the
-people of Hanuabada and Elevada begin to test each vessel in the
-harbour, trying how the ropes run, how the sails work, and how the
-lashings hold together. Everything is thoroughly overhauled, for the
-lives of the men-folk of the village depend upon the fitness of their
-queer craft. The crew go on board and take up their positions. At the
-bow stands the professional pilot, a man thoroughly acquainted with the
-coast, and behind him, stretching in Indian file down the gunwale on
-port and starboard, stand his crew, each man handling a long pole. The
-steering is done from behind with two poles slightly flattened at the
-ends, and forward, for certain emergencies, they use a small Chinese
-sweep. The crew pole gently out from land until the breeze strikes the
-sails, and then far away they go merrily down the harbour, tacking about
-in every direction with wonderful dexterity, for the _lakatois_, clumsy
-although they appear, are quick “in stays.”
-
-[Illustration:
-
- GIRLS DANCING ON A LAKATOI (A RAFT OF CANOES).
-]
-
-At last comes the day when the Hanuabada people say, “If the wind is
-favourable, we will start tomorrow.” Vast quantities of farinaceous food
-are brought on board, and the small dug-outs are busy darting out from
-the village to the fleet, bearing the stores that are to last the
-voyagers for their two months’ trip. Then the festivities begin. The
-damsels of the village deck themselves most artistically with finely
-woven garlands that lie in close cinctures round their brows. In most
-ravishing _ramis_ they go on board and celebrate the departure of the
-young braves by the wildest dances on the platforms fore and aft—dances
-that would put a _première danseuse_ to shame. They spin round with such
-dizzying rapidity that, when I photographed them, although I used a
-shutter snapping at a hundredth of a second, the image of the dancers
-was somewhat blurred, as will be seen from the annexed picture. As an
-accompaniment to the dances, they sing the appalling and discordant
-songs of the coast native, and the merriment and motion cease only for
-the intervals of feasting on yams, taro, and fish. The dancing is for
-the most part independent, but occasionally there is some attempt at
-rudimentary figures, and the little girls, with arms interlaced after
-the manner of a “lady’s chain” in the Lancers, form a ring in the
-centre, while the bigger girls circle around.
-
-Some of the young braves sleep on board the last night, and the next day
-at dawn, if the wind should be favourable, a start is made. The last
-good-byes are said, the small canoes dart to and from the shore with
-final messages, and as the great _lakatois_ slowly get under way, the
-girls crowd upon the beach, shouting and waving to their young heroes,
-until the last odd-shaped sail has disappeared round the farthest
-promontory. The men of the village will not be seen again for two
-months, and some perhaps not at all, for the voyage is long and beset
-with divers perils, and not every _lakatoi_ weathers the sudden
-treacherous squalls and storms of the Papuan coast.
-
-Their captains, of course, have no knowledge whatever of the science of
-navigation, and sail their vessels by cross bearings, or—when out of
-sight of land—by sheer instinct.
-
-During the whole time that the traders are absent, gloom reigns in
-Hanuabada. At nightfall the desolate women bar themselves into their
-houses, and remain in the most jealous seclusion until the daylight
-reappears. It is a most unflattering reflection that this custom has
-only arisen since Europeans first came to Papua.
-
-From Port Moresby I intended to go sixty miles westward to Yule Island,
-and thence push into the interior of British New Guinea, where I
-proposed to pursue the special scientific work for which my expedition
-had been undertaken. The point which I intended to use as my centre of
-operations would require a journey up country of at least three weeks’
-duration, through an almost unknown region, where only native paths
-existed, or, at the best, a missionary road extending for a short
-distance. Wheeled traffic was, of course, impossible, and everything
-would have to be transported by carriers. The first necessity was,
-therefore, to procure transport, a work of infinite difficulty; but at
-last, chiefly through the great assistance and courtesy of Mr. Hislop,
-then resident magistrate of the district of Mekeo, sixty miles west of
-Port Moresby, I obtained a sufficient number of carriers. Mr. Hislop
-then took the trouble to go as far inland with me as our first
-halting-place, Epa, in order to help me and to use his influence to
-persuade the natives to give me their services. The gross weight of the
-baggage to be carried must have been, at least, 2000 lbs., and it
-consisted first and foremost of what is technically known as “trade,”
-that is, beads, axes, 18–inch knives, 9–inch knives, 6–inch knives,
-tobacco, looking-glasses, red calico, bright-coloured cotton prints,
-plane-irons for axe-heads, Jew’s-harps—for which a Papuan will do almost
-anything—and, most valued of all, dogs’ teeth. In addition to this, I
-had to carry the whole of my apparatus for collecting—100 nets, 60 to 70
-cyanide bottles and enough cyanide of potassium to poison the whole
-population of New Guinea, store boxes, pins, cork bungs, and lamps. I
-had also a complete photographic equipment.
-
-For our own sustenance we carried a great quantity of tinned provisions,
-and enough rice to feed our carriers for the journey both ways. I ought
-not to omit to mention our tents, another heavy item of transport. For
-arms we had our 12–bores, our revolvers, one Winchester repeating rifle,
-and one Winchester repeating shot-gun, with sufficient ammunition. We
-also carried a store of empty cartridge cases, recappers, loose powder,
-shot, and caps, extractors and refillers. Before setting out it was
-necessary to make bags of stout canvas, sewn with twine and fortified
-with two coats of paint. Into these all our baggage was packed, and each
-bundle was duly numbered.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER IV
- _WE STRIKE INLAND_
-
-We start Inland—Friendly Natives but Hostile Mosquitoes—Bioto Creek—
-Bioto—Guest Houses—A Splendid Game Region—Daily Migration of Flocks of
-Pigeons—Greedy Coast Natives—Carriers Inadequate—A Double Journey in
-Relays—We meet the Chief Mavai, a great Papuan Character—Mavai’s Way of
-Life—His Harem—His Western Notions—His Trousers—His Red Coat—His Severe
-Discipline—As we proceed, Construction of Native Houses more elaborate—
-On to Ekeikei and Dinawa—March through Wet Vegetation—Tortured by
-Leeches and an Abominable Parasite, the Scrub-Itch—A Gloomy Forest—
-Magnificent Orchids—Carriers stimulate Laggard Comrades with Nettles—The
-Aculama River—I discover a New Fish.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER IV
- WE STRIKE INLAND
-
-
-We left Yule Island at 10 A.M. in a small boat, accompanied by two
-Mission Fathers. Our baggage came on with us at the same time in a rough
-boat. We reached the mouth of the river at noon, and found some natives
-there fishing. They were very friendly and gave us some fish. At that
-point the entrance to the river was about half a mile broad, but across
-it there was a big bar. At 2 P.M. we had entered the Bioto Creek, where
-we suffered tremendously from mosquitoes. Here, in fact, they are quite
-a terror, and this is believed to be the very worst place for mosquitoes
-in all New Guinea. During the first night that we halted there I had not
-fixed my net properly, so I slept very little owing to the annoyance of
-these insects. It is an unhealthy spot, and fever rages. The village is
-very small, containing only nineteen houses for the regular inhabitants,
-and two houses, one at each end, for visitors. This provision for the
-stranger within their gates is a general custom in every Papuan village.
-Despite this form of hospitality, however, the Bioto people are not very
-amiable, and I found them extremely greedy. The region is a perfect one
-for game, especially for duck and pigeon. Every evening one sees clouds
-of pigeons flying over the sea from the mainland to Pigeon Island. In
-the morning they return. This migration is to secure safety, as Pigeon
-Island is uninhabited, and in its mangrove swamps the birds know that
-they can sleep unmolested. After a night’s rest, such as it was, we
-prepared to start again, but found the natives somewhat unwilling to go
-on. At length they agreed to take us by canoe as far as the path to Epa,
-about ten miles from the Bioto Creek, and from that place they would
-take us five miles by road to Jack’s camp, which was six miles distant
-from Epa. For this journey they demanded an absurd price—each carrier
-wanted a 16–inch knife, a tomahawk, or a pearl-shell—and in this
-extravagant rating of their services they showed themselves typical
-coast natives. The mountain people would have done the same work for one
-stick of tobacco. Before we had come to terms the day had worn away, and
-it was necessary to remain another night at Bioto. Next morning we were
-up early, and by the time we had breakfasted, the carriers, fifteen in
-all, who had come from their gardens the night before, were ready to
-take up their burdens. The number available was still inadequate, but as
-no more were to be had we had to make up our minds to a double journey.
-We stayed the night at Jack’s camp, sending on a messenger to Epa to ask
-the chief Mavai to bring his people down the next day. By ten o’clock
-the next morning Mavai had not arrived, so we decided to walk to Epa and
-see him, at the same time hoping that we might meet him by the way. We
-took Sam (my Cingalese servant) with us, and as there were two tracks,
-he took one and I the other, each arranging to fire a gun if either
-should meet Mavai. As it happened we met Mavai most opportunely just
-where the two tracks met, and Sam, who had only gone a few yards, was
-with us in a minute. Mavai explained that, as it was already late in the
-day, he would not call his people together, but would make arrangements
-for them to carry for us on the following day.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- EPA VILLAGE, MAVAI’S CAPITAL.
-]
-
-Mavai, the chief of Epa, is a magnificent autocrat, and is proud to be
-the white man’s friend. He was credited with powers of sorcery—hence his
-extraordinary influence. He overshadowed me with his favour, and
-commanded his entire village to “carry for Parki”—the Epan attempt to
-pronounce my name. Thus I obtained the force I required to take me
-onwards, and I went, one might almost say, on the shoulders of Epa—men,
-women, and children. The chief himself shouldered a load, without loss
-of dignity, and with great advantage to his royal pocket.
-
-My princely benefactor was no ordinary man. He stood about six feet
-high. His features were of Roman type, his bearing active and alert, his
-frame strong and wiry. Keen eyes looked out of a dark copper-coloured
-visage, which gained by contrast with a scarlet coat—a discarded British
-uniform, his only ceremonial garment, donned on occasions of great
-gravity. Such an occasion was the issuing of his command to carry for
-me. With due ceremony he mounted a platform erected near his house, and
-assuming the red coat he addressed his assembled people with magnificent
-oratory, emphasising his speech by actions. Mavai is a strict
-disciplinarian, and I have seen him administer personal chastisement to
-recalcitrant villagers. He is a mighty hunter, a fact attested by his
-crushed right hand, which was maimed by a bite from a wild pig. Our
-friend is a great polygamist, and formerly had fifteen wives. When we
-were there at Epa he possessed only five, to whom he was extremely kind,
-although he made them work pretty hard. One of them was specially
-appointed to wait upon her lord at his meals. On the death of another he
-was deeply affected, and cut off his mop of hair. He kept up
-considerable state, and at meal times sat in his house in a different
-apartment from that in which he slept. He was not above taking food with
-us, and used to ask for tobacco in a very lordly way. He smoked a
-European pipe, of which he was particularly proud, and when it was
-between his lips he used to touch the bowl consequentially and say,
-“Parki,” thus signifying to me that he was no small beer. He would pay
-the deepest attention throughout a long story, looking steadily at you,
-and when you had finished he would tell you what he thought, giving
-elaborate reasons. In the centre of his house hung a hurricane lamp,
-which he had got from Jack Exton, the sandalwood trader. He understood
-the working of the lamp quite well, and kept a supply of kerosene in the
-house in a tin. He was also indebted to Mr. Exton for a further adjunct
-of civilisation, viz. a pair of trousers very unfashionably big at the
-knee. His Highness used European spoons, forks, and knives.
-
-Mavai had adopted a coloured orphan, whom he kept under very strict
-discipline. This youth refused to go with Sam to Oo-fa-fa, and when the
-chief found out that his express orders had been disobeyed, he cut off a
-stick and thrashed the boy indoors for all he was worth. The boy
-received ten cuts, but neither moved nor howled, although the women of
-the village set up a dolorous wailing while the punishment was going on.
-As soon as the castigation was finished, Mavai seemed to be seized with
-sudden shamefacedness, for he ran at top speed to his sago plantation,
-and remained in retirement for a considerable time.
-
-At Epa the native houses begin to be beautifully constructed. They are
-on a raised platform, and look like inverted boats, the roof being
-formed by bending over long sticks, so as to form an arch that is
-thatched with sago leaf. The floor is particularly good, and at Epa
-there is an admirable guest-house, with a fine level floor of split
-sago, the pieces being 1¼ inches wide, neatly laid and bound together.
-
-Mavai’s guest-house, which adjoined his dwelling-house, was open at both
-ends. The house poles are very substantial, for they are driven into the
-iron ground, which is very stony, and radiated great heat, so that one
-could not go comfortably without boots, although in this respect the
-natives seem to be pachydermatous.
-
-We saw Mavai’s son build a house, neither asking nor requiring
-assistance. Single-handed he brought up his poles, peeled off the bark,
-and drove them in.
-
-One evening during our stay there was a terrific wind storm, a heavy
-north-wester, which tried the architecture of Epa severely. One slender
-house began to heel over, and it was accordingly tied to a tree with
-strands of cane, and a large gang of men held these stays until the
-worst of the storm was passed. Even Mavai’s substantial house gave way a
-little under the tempest.
-
-It was about 9.50 when we started on our journey from Epa to Ekeikei. We
-sent twenty-five carriers on with their loads, and we ourselves followed
-with the remainder of the baggage. Of course we could not carry
-everything on this trip, and it was my intention, when we finally
-reached our destination at Dinawa, to send back mountain men to bring
-the rest of the material up the forty miles’ tramp from Epa.
-
-At first the path led downwards, and very soon we came to a small river,
-over which—as the existing bamboo bridge was unsafe owing to a freshet—
-we had to be carried by the natives. We always took great care to avoid,
-as far as possible, getting our clothes wet, as this accident renders
-the European traveller particularly liable to fever. In this case,
-however, this precaution proved futile, owing to the oncoming of a
-downpour of rain—the last we were to see for nine months.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- EKEIKEI NATIVES.
-]
-
-At times the brushwood was very dense, and we had to cut our way, but
-where the forest was closely matted above, forming a thick canopy which
-excluded the light, nothing, of course, could grow beneath. At points
-where the light penetrated, the undergrowth was immediately thick again.
-The path, such as it was, was stony and hard. As we trudged along in the
-wet, we made the acquaintance of a new discomfort. This manifested
-itself in the presence of a leech, a little creature about ¾–inch long,
-with a slender body, very much smaller than the European variety, but
-inflicting the same sort of three-cornered bite. The native carriers
-offer the easiest victims, for the leeches fasten upon their bare heels
-in great numbers, and they had constantly to stop and brush them off
-with little switches which they carried in their hands. Sometimes, when
-the leeches had bitten very deep, the carriers had to lay down their
-loads and pull them off with their fingers. They would endure them until
-they became too bad, say, when a dozen or so had adhered to each foot.
-At this time we did not suffer much, but later on, in the journey from
-Faula to Mafulu, they got over the tops of our boots and socks and
-attacked our ankles. The bite was not actually painful, and the presence
-of our enemy was not revealed until we realised that our feet were wet
-with blood. The chief haunts of the leech are wet stones and moss and
-low herbage.
-
-Another discomfort which we experienced at this point of our journey was
-the abominable attack of the scrub-itch, a nasty little parasite that
-the wayfarer brushes from the low herbage as he moves along. This
-hateful microscopic creature, which is of a bright red colour, gets
-under the skin and causes terrible irritation. The affection spreads,
-and if one is so unwise as to scratch the place, there is no hope of
-relief for at least three weeks. The only satisfactory remedy is to
-bathe the part in warm salt and water. Scrub-itch, leeches, and
-mosquitoes at times render life in the forest anything but blissful, yet
-Nature, according to her law, offers her compensations, even in the
-primeval forest.
-
-About the elevation that we were traversing there grows a particular
-kind of palm, peculiarly grateful to the native when he is hungry—a not
-infrequent occurrence—and at such moments of stress they discard their
-loads, search out this palm and cut it down. At the top, just below the
-crown of the palm, the last shoot, about six feet long, remains green.
-It is opened lengthways, and is peeled until the inside layers are
-reached. These layers are straw-coloured, like asparagus, and to the
-taste are sweet, slightly dashed with acid. Europeans, as well as
-natives, can eat great quantities of this wholesome and enjoyable food
-with impunity. It is excellent also for quenching thirst, for which it
-is often most convenient, as it grows in waterless regions.
-
-The gloom of the forest was diversified by the colours of its
-extraordinary orchids. One of these (_grammatophyllum speciosum_), which
-had made its home on a lofty tree, was of almost incredible luxuriance,
-and could the whole plant have been secured, it would not have weighed
-less than half a ton. I despatched one of my native boys to climb the
-tree to see if he could secure a specimen. He went about his task in the
-native fashion. The climber stands with his face to the trunk, which, as
-well as his body, is encircled with a hoop of rattan cane. This hoop he
-holds in each hand, and his ankles are tied together. First, he leans
-back until his body has purchase on the hoop, and then at that moment,
-by the leverage of his ankles, he makes an upward movement of about a
-foot. Then, falling backwards against the hoop, and pressing his feet
-against the trunk, he is supported for the next spring. This operation
-is repeated with marvellous dexterity and rapidity, and with this
-contrivance the youth makes his way to the top. There is no tree in New
-Guinea that a native cannot climb thus.
-
-In the present instance, my man was not destined to have any luck, for
-the network of roots round the tree formed such a wide-spreading dome
-that he could not make his way over to the crown to secure a specimen of
-the orchid, and the attempt had accordingly to be abandoned.
-
-We pressed on along the rough track, which was everywhere beset with
-precipices and ravines that compelled us to take the greatest care. The
-road was fairly practicable, however, for transit, and there were no
-very serious obstructions at this stage of the journey. My people were
-in good spirits, and we plodded on as gaily as might be, occasionally
-stopping and giving the men a smoke. Despite the toils of the road,
-these halts in the forest were perfectly delightful, for we had in the
-improvement of the air a foretaste of the pleasant freshness that was to
-make life in the mountains of New Guinea so tolerable and even
-attractive.
-
-After five hours’ march we arrived at Ekeikei, rather tired and ready
-for slumber, but here, alas! there was no rest for us. The native
-carriers had to lodge, some in our hut, some under it, and their method
-of spending the night was not favourable to repose. Their idea is to
-sleep for half-an-hour, and then light their pipes and spin yarns,
-which, to judge by their uproarious laughter, must have been extremely
-diverting. After the story-telling, they obliged us with songs, and the
-music wooed them again to a brief period of slumber. It did not woo us,
-for the coast natives have no ear, and their music is very unlike the
-soft and flowing song of the mountaineers. This performance went on
-until daybreak, when we rose. In order to make a satisfactory day’s
-journey it was necessary to start at 5 A.M. We had to prepare our own
-breakfast and give the natives theirs, and then we set out for Madui.
-
-Again, the path wound past high precipices and deep ravines until we
-came to our first resting-place, Bamboo Camp, so called from a clump of
-bamboo that formed a natural shelter. Here the forest trees were so high
-and thick that scarcely any sun or light could penetrate. It was gloomy
-in the extreme, and very depressing, the silence broken only by the
-drip, drip of the rain, and the only sound of life was the “wauk,”
-“wauk” of the bird of paradise.
-
-For two hours the track skirted the Deeanay precipice, and our way led
-under enormous overhanging boulders which would reach out some distance
-overhead. These were the more impressive in that they seemed to have no
-hold, and the imagination made teasing suggestions as to what would
-happen if one of them were to topple over. From the crevices little
-springs issued, and in these damp nooks there was a luxuriant growth of
-lichens and begonias in flower. While accomplishing the long
-circumvention of the crags, it was impossible to obtain a view of the
-Deeanay, but as we broke out into more open forest, close to Madui, one
-could form some idea of its rocky magnificence.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- THE CAMP AT EKEIKEI.
-]
-
-Close to the Deeanay precipice we noted an extraordinary sight. Under a
-large tree that rose to a height of some 150 feet, were huge mounds,
-quite five feet high, of veritable sawdust, that seemed to proclaim the
-presence of man. On a nearer approach the wonder became greater, for the
-heaps were being continually augmented by a constant rain of sawdust of
-different grains, some finer than others. No human sawyer, of course,
-was there, but the tree, to a height of at least 100 feet, was riddled
-by coleopterous larvæ. Several families of these were represented. The
-tree, which was about five feet in diameter, and had a thin bark, was,
-as might be expected, dying. It must have possessed some strange
-attraction, for it was most unusual in New Guinea to find beetles thus
-congregated. The distribution is usually very scattered. The holes were
-probably made at first by small beetles of various families, but chiefly
-anobiadæ, followed as a rule by brenthidæ, later probably by
-longicorniæ. One species follows the other into the same hole, each
-succeeding species bigger than its predecessor. Sometimes the
-lepidoptera make borings, but this sawdust was much finer. Only a few
-living branches remained on the tree, which was a mere shell. It was,
-however, so well protected from winds that it still stood. Close by we
-saw a native hut, uninhabited, of very rude construction. This point of
-our journeyings is otherwise memorable, for it was here, near a creek,
-that we found some of our finest butterflies—lycenidæ, papiliosidæ,
-satyridæ, and ornithoptera primus.
-
-We were glad to continue the ascent to Madui, where once more we emerged
-into the welcome light of the sun. When we were two hours’ distance from
-Madui, one of our carriers struck work and refused to go any farther.
-There was only one way of persuasion, to which I was greatly averse, but
-his comrades considered it necessary, and their method, which was, after
-all, not very harsh, had the desired effect. The other carriers picked
-the leaves of a gigantic nettle, and with these they gently whipped the
-reluctant one until he was fain to “jog on the footpath way, and merrily
-hent the stile a’.” A little later, he tried to desert, but his comrades
-brought him back, and when we halted he was kept in the centre of the
-camp under strict surveillance. When he had had a good rest and a hearty
-meal, however, he went on as cheerfully as the others.
-
-We reached the foot of Madui Hill at 3.30 P.M., and a climb of
-half-an-hour brought us to the summit, which commands a fine view. On a
-clear day Hall Sound is visible on the coast side, and inland there is a
-grand prospect of mountain scenery. All the way up it had rained
-incessantly, and we were drenched to the skin. Our journey over rocks
-and precipices, watercourses and ravines, had completely tired us out,
-and, fortunately, the natives were too fatigued to sing. Accordingly, we
-contrived to get a good night’s rest, and did not leave Madui until 9.25
-A.M. next day.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- THE RETURN OF MY COLLECTORS WITH BIRDS OF PARADISE AFTER A FEW HOURS’
- SHOOTING AT EKEIKEI.
-]
-
-Getting under weigh again, we descended from Madui into a ravine, where
-we passed a delightful waterfall, far away up on the precipices of the
-river Aculama, which we were to know better during our stay in New
-Guinea. The waterfall was on one of the tributaries of a little river,
-which we could see far below us rushing over its rocky bed in small
-cataracts that alternated with still blue pools. The trees in the ravine
-were loaded with lycopodiums and ferns, and, in their season, a few
-rhododendrons. The cluster of flowers was like a golden ball the size of
-a man’s head. On a later journey I secured the root, but it died before
-I could get it down to the coast for shipment. These rhododendrons did
-not grow alone, but attached themselves to tree trunks.
-
-Another curiosity of the Aculama was a large fresh-water prawn, of which
-I got wind from the natives’ talk. As soon as I heard it mentioned, I
-told my boys that if they could bring me a specimen I would pay well for
-it, and also for examples of the fish of the Aculama. They accordingly
-went in quest of the crustacean, and before long they brought me a
-specimen. The prawn haunts the eddies under the large boulders, around
-which the natives draw their net so as to lie close to the shape of the
-stone. They then pull it out of the water gradually, and occasionally
-find that they have caught one or two specimens. The variety is about 5
-inches long, of a transparent brown when caught, very much like our
-British prawns, and when cooked of a rich red. The pincers and legs are
-longer than those of the marine species. They make delightful morsels,
-and are a welcome addition to the explorer’s larder, which provides
-changes none too many.
-
-In the waters of the Aculama I had also the good fortune to discover an
-entirely new fish, the _rhiacichthys Novæ Guineæ_, which has been
-described by Mr. Boulenger, and I am permitted to print his account in
-the Appendix.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER V
- _THE FIRST CAMP_
-
-Journey continued—A Glorious Scarlet Creeper—Dinawa—Site for Camp
-selected—Building Camp—Native Assistance—Organisation for Scientific
-Work—Daily Routine—Teaching the Natives how to Catch and Handle
-Entomological Specimens—Sudden Affluence leads one of my Native Boys to
-Desert—He is Caught and Reformed—My best Native Assistant and his Wife—
-Female Influence a great Asset with other Women—The Day’s Work—
-Collecting at Night—Photography—A Dark Room in the Wilds—Native Interest
-in Developing.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER V
- THE FIRST CAMP
-
-
-To return, however, to our journey. We crossed the Aculama by a
-missionary bridge, a rough structure made of two trees placed about a
-couple of feet apart, and laid with cross strips of wood. At once we
-began our climb to Dinawa up a winding forest path—the last stage of the
-march which was to bring us to our permanent camp. I was always on the
-look-out for natural treasures, and when we got to the top of the ridge
-just beyond the Aculama, I was fortunate enough to see in a ravine just
-below a magnificent example of D’Alberti’s creeper. D’Alberti had
-discovered it on the Fly River. The one I found here in the mountains
-was of the variety named _Macuna Bennetti_. It ran up its supporting
-trunk on a stem which was about 6 inches thick at the base. At the
-height of 200 feet it found light, threw out slender arms, and then
-dropped down bunches of festoons 20 feet long, a magnificent blaze of
-scarlet blossom. The flowers of the _Macuna Bennetti_ are distinguished
-by a calyx covered with short hairs, some short and pliable, a few
-stiff. When we reached the top of Dinawa Hill we found patches of grass
-growing, which did not occur anywhere on the lower slopes.
-
-We at once set about selecting a piece of ground for our camp, and found
-a level, grassy space, which required only the cutting of a few trees to
-make it clear enough for our purpose. There was, however, very little
-brushwood to cut. Pending the building of a more permanent home, we
-pitched our tent and settled down for the first night at our base of
-operations. Dinawa village was fifty yards away, and the native men came
-timidly out to look at us. They were very suspicious, and their
-womenkind so shy that it was a considerable time before they would
-venture to approach our camp.
-
-The day after our arrival the carriers went back, and it was to the
-Papuans of the vicinity that we had to look for the labour that was to
-build our house. My Cingalese servant, Sam, spoke the language, and he
-made the overtures to our dusky neighbours. We were careful to let them
-get some inkling of the “trade” we carried, and this seemed to encourage
-them to greater boldness. Occasionally we would open a box in front of
-our visitors and show them an axe or a knife, whereat they would say
-“lo-pi-ang,” that is, “good,” the first word, probably, that a European
-would hear from the lips of a Papuan. A little present of tobacco would
-help matters greatly, and in return for this the beneficiary would say
-with the ingratiating guilelessness of a child, “Parki lo-pi-ang” (good
-Pratt). In time the neighbouring villages, hearing of the vast wealth
-that had arrived at Dinawa, came in too, and I was able to engage a
-force of workers, whose numbers varied from ten to fifteen, and who
-commenced immediately to build my house. These were to be paid when the
-house was finished; but during the ten days that the building was going
-on they were given occasional supplies of tobacco as a gratuity. The
-average wage per day was three sticks of tobacco, or one rami, which
-would mean about 1¼ yards of scarlet calico. At the end of the time each
-man was to receive a large 18–inch knife, or an axe, and a certain
-number of sticks of tobacco.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- HILL NATIVES AT DINAWA.
-]
-
-For our house, we first drove into the ground two stout poles 18 feet
-apart. These carried the main beam of the roof. At a distance of 6 feet
-on each side of these poles we placed the corner supports of the house,
-each 12 feet high. The framework was then joined up with poles of
-unsplit bamboo tied with split cane, and the framework of the walls
-consisted of upright pieces of split bamboo set in the ground 1 foot
-apart. We then wattled these uprights with smaller pieces of split
-bamboo, the sides and gables of the house forming a complete
-basket-work. From the ridge-pole we dropped bamboo rafters extending far
-beyond the walls, so as to give very wide eaves, and throw the drip of
-the rain as far out as possible. We were now ready to thatch the roof,
-and for this we required large quantities of grass. The natives by this
-time had gained sufficient confidence in us to allow their women to work
-for us, and accordingly I employed ten women as grass-cutters, and kept
-them for several days at work cutting with 6–inch knives, which we
-supplied. They had no distance to go to find sufficient grass for our
-purpose, but the procuring of heavier poles and bamboo was a different
-matter. The wood had to be cut at a point some distance down the hill,
-and it took quite three hours to bring up each of the heavier logs. When
-the roof was on we nailed down our floor, which was made of bamboo fixed
-to cross-pieces 6 inches off the ground. The material was not ideal, for
-the joints were never closed, and small articles used to fall down into
-the cracks. We made our door frame of axed wood and covered it with
-thick canvas.
-
-We had also to build our collecting verandah, which we placed on the
-edge of a precipice not far from the house. It had a 20–foot frontage,
-and was 12 feet wide, with a division down the centre at the ridge-pole
-of the roof, which made it, properly speaking, two verandahs placed back
-to back, so that when the wind was unfavourable on one side, we could
-find shelter on the other. The whole of the structure was raised off the
-ground on poles, and the boys had their quarters beneath.
-
-Such was our establishment at Dinawa. When we had finished it we began
-to settle down, and were able to organise the camp for work. A native
-boy called Doboi, from near Dinawa village, was engaged as cook, and we
-had also a water-boy, Matu, whose duty was to go down the hill, a tramp
-of three-quarters of an hour, to a beautiful spring whence we derived
-our supply. It was lovely water, for the declivity gave no opportunity
-for decomposing vegetable matter to collect. The well always ran clear,
-and, even at the worst part of the drought, did not fail us altogether,
-although its trickle had sunk to the size of an ordinary lead-pencil,
-and the boy had to wait quite a long time before he could fill the
-billies.
-
-We built our fire outside the house in the open space, gipsy fashion,
-and hung the billy, in which we did all our cooking, on a stick resting
-on two forked upright sticks. Gradually our working day fell into a
-regular routine. We awoke with the dawn, but had always to trust to
-ourselves to make the first start, as your Papuan will not wake a
-sleeping man. He has indeed a superstitious awe of the slumberer. If one
-must be awakened, it must not be by a shake, and when Doboi had advanced
-far enough to bring us a cup of tea in the morning, he would tread very
-warily.
-
-When we were fairly astir, we found Doboi already about and the fire
-going. Then he would make tea while Harry or I baked cakes. The bread
-rises easily in New Guinea owing to the temperature, and we were never
-at a loss for yeast; for I had brought with me a small quantity of hops,
-and we kept our supply going by keeping back a piece of dough from every
-batch. This fragment, no bigger than a pocket matchbox, we placed in an
-ordinary pound tin, and by noon it had swelled right over the edges. We
-breakfasted on bread and dripping of pig, when we had been able to buy
-one from the natives, and sometimes we substituted coffee for tea. By
-seven o’clock breakfast was finished, the boys having had theirs under
-the verandah. It was then time for them to be off to their collecting,
-but they were difficult to move. They wanted to sit and smoke. Once off,
-they might do a day’s work, but on the other hand there was just the
-chance that they would waste their employer’s time in the forest,
-smoking and telling stories; or, if they had killed and caught anything,
-they would immediately sit down and cook it. If this happened they would
-come home empty-handed, quite shamelessly, saying “awpapoo achi” (no
-butterflies).
-
-Each boy was supplied with a large butterfly net and collecting box. In
-every box we stuck a certain number of pins, and told the boy that if he
-filled his box with good specimens he would receive a stick of tobacco.
-Bad specimens I always discarded in the culprit’s presence, so that his
-iniquity might come home to him. I had, of course, to undertake the
-training of the collectors myself, although Sam helped to explain the
-method.
-
-First, I got a butterfly and showed how to handle it and pin it sideways
-into the box. The crucial matter was the seizing of it once it was in
-the net. It must be carefully taken between finger and thumb and the
-thorax pinched on the under side. If it be pinched from above—as every
-butterfly collector knows—the operator’s finger-marks would show on the
-wings and betray slovenly handling. Some of the boys became very
-neat-fingered after a time, but others would not learn at all, and were
-so shameless that they would bring in part of a wing carefully stuck on
-the pin—in fact, it was “anything to fill your box.” Occasionally the
-less scrupulous would appropriate the pins to their own use. Of course
-there was nothing for it but to pay off and send away such useless
-fellows.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- DOBOI, OUR NATIVE COOK AT DINAWA.
-]
-
-Making due allowance, however, for the fact that they were savages, the
-general character of my collectors said a great deal for human nature.
-Doboi was a really good fellow, and had only one reprehensible escapade
-to his discredit. It was a case of the deceitfulness of wealth! He had
-worked extremely well and had amassed a small fortune, a blanket, many
-ramis, and a quantity of tobacco. With these possessions, he became a
-small king in his village. One day he vanished with all his goods. Now
-Doboi was under contract to remain with me while I was in the interior,
-and although he had received much, he had not really worked off his part
-of the bargain. Accordingly I had him pursued and brought back, and
-thereafter for the rest of his time he was a good boy. He was fourteen,
-but had attained to full manhood, and was a very capable fellow.
-
-My best mountain boy, however, was Ow-bow. He was my right hand, my
-native first officer. I could send him anywhere, for he was quick and
-alert, but he always stipulated that he must go armed, and believing him
-to be justified, I invariably provided him with a weapon. He loved
-firearms passionately, and to see Ow-bow enter a village with his gun
-over his shoulder was to realise on a small scale what a Roman triumph
-must have been! He understood the weapon—his fellow-tribesmen did not.
-Therein lay Ow-bow’s power. He would fire a shot in the air and then lay
-down the law to his comrades. If there were any possibility of getting
-what you wanted, Ow-bow would get it. He would, indeed, have done well
-on an American newspaper. He understood how to make the most of what
-knowledge he had, and was fully conscious that it gave him superior
-power, which he was not slow to wield. When he went to a village to
-recruit carriers, he arrayed himself in his best, donned his finest
-beads and feathers, and painted his cheeks in scarlet stripes. Thus
-resplendent, with his gun over his shoulder, he entered the village,
-strutting consequentially, and immediately made his presence felt. He
-was a man who would not and could not be refused. He showed his wages
-and told the tribesmen that they, if they carried for Parki, would
-become rich in like manner.
-
-More subtle still was his dealing when he had been sent to engage women
-for grass-cutting or similar employment. Ow-bow was a married man who
-had permission for his wife to stay in camp with him, and this lady
-proved his great advocate with her own sex. While Ow-bow waxed eloquent
-and persuasive with the men, Mrs. Ow-bow would display to the womenkind
-what wealth had also come to her, and as she reasoned, her sisters were
-persuaded, and took service with the white man. But Ow-bow’s flourishes
-with the gun were no mere vainglorious show. In two months’ time he had
-become a really good shot, and after a morning’s sport would often
-return to camp with five or six birds. He invariably accounted for his
-empty cartridges, while other boys would return with spent cases and
-never a feather to show for them. He grasped the method of aiming at
-once and never showed any amateurish disposition to squint along the
-barrel, but got his sights on the bird neatly and quickly and fired
-without hesitation. He seldom missed.
-
-During the morning, while the boys were out at work, Harry and I would
-also be engaged with our nets; or, as our collections increased, we
-would be busy putting specimens together, tending them and seeing that
-they were not suffering from damp. Sometimes, taking a couple of the
-laziest boys with me, I descended to the Aculama and followed the stream
-up its course, collecting as we went. As the boys’ skill increased, it
-became possible to send them two by two so that several localities could
-be worked simultaneously. Work, still further afield, fell to Sam, who
-often went away with five or six carriers on collecting expeditions that
-lasted a week or a fortnight.
-
-The best time of day for butterflies is from 8 A.M. till noon. The boys
-returned to camp at times varying according to their luck or their
-laziness, and in any case, we had all returned by three o’clock. Then
-Doboi or Weiyah cooked a meal which varied in excellence according to
-the state of the stores or our luck with the gun, and afterwards we took
-our siesta. The late afternoon or early evening found us at work again
-on the collections or putting the camp straight. Darkness descended
-quickly, and when there was no moon we went to the verandah and began
-collecting moths. On favourable nights we often continued at work till
-daybreak.
-
-The boys did not care about night work and usually sat round the camp
-fire smoking, spinning yarns, or crooning their charmingly plaintive
-mountain melodies until about 1 A.M., when they curled up under the
-verandah and went to sleep. Occasionally one or two very hard-up young
-gentlemen, whose need of tobacco was urgent, would volunteer to assist
-in the moth-catching, but for the most part they preferred free evenings
-like the young working people of more advanced nations. Visitors from
-Dinawa dropped in until the camp became a thronged resort. Then
-unfortunately things began to disappear, and it was necessary to keep
-the natives at a greater distance and restrict liberty of entrance. “No
-admission except on business” became the rule for outsiders. On my own
-boys, I found it was best to impose no cast-iron regulations.
-
-Nor were these all our occupations. Besides the lepidoptera, there were
-ornithological and botanical specimens to collect and preserve. Of the
-last, the more succulent required constant care and changing, and some
-took three weeks to dry. Photography proved a pleasant change, and on
-nights unfavourable for moths, we darkened the house with blankets and
-had a spell of developing. At such times one realised poignantly the
-limitations of a savage country, and the value of things that at home
-are too commonplace to be remarked. Our chief lack was a good flat
-shelf. Amateur photographers with luxurious equipment should figure to
-themselves the discomforts of a ridgy shelf of split bamboo on which no
-bottle will stand upright. Groping in the dim red light among one’s
-materials on that crazy ledge was as productive of maledictions as the
-royal and ancient game itself.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- THE NATIVE VILLAGE OF DINAWA.
-]
-
-The natives were, at first, very much frightened at the camera, the
-women especially, and some of them were never reconciled to it. I showed
-them stereoscopic slides of Papuan views on Negretti and Zambra’s
-veroscope. One fellow, on seeing his own portrait stand out in bold
-relief, dropped the stereoscope and ran up a tree. I occasionally
-allowed a few privileged natives to come into the dark room to watch the
-developing. At first they were rather alarmed at the red light, but
-gradually they became interested in the process, and as the image
-appeared we heard the inevitable “lo-pi-ang.”
-
-Such was our daily life at Dinawa—very enjoyable in the crisp and
-bracing mountain air that reminded one of an English October. But for
-the unavoidable cares of camp management and fears for the endurance of
-our food supply and the safety of our specimens, it would have been
-altogether ideal.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER VI
- _VICISSITUDES AND A DIGRESSION_
-
-The Drought affects our Work—Butterflies begin to Fail—Forest Fires—We
-descend to the St. Joseph River—A Temporary Camp—A Wonderful Native
-Suspension Bridge—River Scenery—Native Methods of Fishing—Dull Weather
-and Little Success in Collecting—A Comic Incident—A Native besieged by a
-Wild Pig—War—Native Hostility—A Chief threatens to Cook and Eat our
-Heads—Strict Guard kept on Camp—The Bird of Paradise—Papuan Game Laws—
-Natives’ Interest in Writing—Further Stay at the St. Joseph
-Impracticable—A Flood destroys our Bridge—A Visit to a Native Village—
-Curious Means of Ingress—Return to Dinawa—My Cingalese Headman’s
-Experiences—He evades Native Treachery—Sudden Growth of a New Township.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER VI
- VICISSITUDES AND A DIGRESSION
-
-
-As the days went on at Dinawa, there was no sign of any breaking up of
-the great drought, which began seriously to affect the success of our
-work. Butterflies grew scarce, and daily the catch fell off, for the
-vegetation was getting very dry. Lycopodiums were dropping off the
-trees, and often we could see, in the lower grounds, great forest fires,
-which consumed the undergrowth throughout large tracts of country, miles
-and miles being left blackened and burnt up. In these conflagrations,
-millions of low-feeding and high-feeding larvæ must have been destroyed,
-and there was a corresponding decrease in the insect life of the
-district. Seeing that, for a time, there was not much more to be done,
-we decided to quit our camp at Dinawa and descend to the St. Joseph
-River; so, on July 22, we set out with thirty carriers, and went down
-into a deep valley, whence we climbed a ridge which brought us to a
-native village so strongly stockaded that we knew that the tribes must
-be at war—village against village—and this unsettled state of affairs
-made it very difficult to persuade the natives to pass with us through
-the open country that lay between the hamlets.
-
-At this place we changed carriers, and, accompanied by the chief of the
-village, we descended by an extremely rough native path to the St.
-Joseph River, which we reached at 4 P.M., after a march of about six
-hours. We found the river very low but beautifully limpid and very
-rapid. For our camp we immediately chose a small patch of sand close to
-the stream, the only clear space we could find; for the river bed and
-the gorge itself were filled with enormous boulders piled one upon the
-other in the wildest confusion.
-
-Our temporary dwellings were of the simplest. Harry and I occupied an
-ordinary fly-tent, and another was pitched for our native followers. On
-the day after our arrival we set about constructing a rough bridge for
-our own convenience. This we did by felling a tree on one side of the
-stream and letting it fall across the river bed as far as it would go.
-We repeated the operation with a thinner tree, which we let fall from
-the opposite bank, and the branches of the two intertwining in the
-middle, gave the structure some sort of continuity. Along the two trunks
-we could scramble without any very great difficulty. Our feat of
-engineering, however, was as nothing compared to the one achieved by our
-savage neighbours, for at a little distance up the stream the Papuans
-had spanned the gorge with a most wonderful suspension bridge. Across
-the ravine they had swung four main chains of bamboo. These were
-fastened at each end to a rigid horizontal cross-piece, and this again
-was braced on one side of the river to two trees, of no very great
-thickness, but of tremendous sustaining power, while on the other the
-chains were laid over the top of an enormous crag, then across a little
-depression in the ground behind it, and so were made fast to trees at
-the height of a few feet from the ground. The four main chains were
-under-girt with loops of bamboo, forming a cradle, along the bottom of
-which single bamboos were laid on end, affording a precarious footway.
-The total length of the span was at least 150 feet, and it swung clear
-of the tree-tops on the wooded sides of the gorge. At its greatest dip
-the bridge must have been 70 feet above the river. The elasticity and
-swing were tremendous, and I confess that the passage of the bridge was
-no joke to one unaccustomed to its giddy eccentricities. On this
-veritable tight-rope custom is everything, for I have seen fifteen
-native carriers at one time dancing carelessly across it, regardless of
-their heavy loads and of the tremendous increase in the oscillation that
-their numbers caused.
-
-I crossed with some natives of the district, and having descended the
-right bank of the St. Joseph for about a mile, we came to the mouth of a
-small tributary, the bed of which we ascended for a distance of half a
-mile. It was a toilsome ascent owing to the enormous boulders, to which
-I have already alluded, and I found that the safest way was to take off
-my shoes and stockings and clamber along bare-foot. At intervals among
-these boulders occurred calm pools of exquisite deep blue water, and
-these the natives choose as their fishing grounds. They favour the pools
-with the narrowest outlets, and dam with leaves the little waterfalls,
-or natural weirs over which the water rushes from one clear expanse to
-another.
-
-My native companions, being very agreeable and obliging fellows, were
-kind enough to send to their villages for the great fishing-nets, 30
-yards long and 6 or 7 feet wide. When the nets arrived, the natives
-collected stones about the size of an orange, wrapped palm leaves round
-them, and then tied them to the edge of the net, until it was evenly
-weighted all along, at intervals of about 6 inches. They then lowered
-their net into the water, so arranging it as to form a half-moon, and,
-scrambling along the sides of the watercourse, they gradually drew the
-mesh towards them, until they reached the upper end of the pool, where
-natives, standing breast-high in the water, landed the fish, as they
-were pressed towards the bank, in large dip nets. Some of the fish
-jumped over the net, and some escaped down stream, and even managed to
-plunge over the weir, for they were strong enough to take a leap of 6
-feet. We caught eight beauties, none under 2 lbs. in weight, and some up
-to 4 lbs. They were, as far as I could make out, a species of
-fresh-water mullet, and in the main stream of the St. Joseph similar
-fish, weighing as much as 15 lbs., are no uncommon catch.
-
-These fish are wonderfully provided by Nature with an appliance which
-helps them to combat the extraordinary current. At one moment you will
-see them being swept down resistlessly, but suddenly they shoot off into
-the quieter water and attach themselves to the rocks by a strong sucker
-near the mouth. There they hang just outside the current, their tails
-moving gently with the eddy; and when they have recovered their
-strength, they make another dash through the swifter waters, coming to
-anchor again when baffled—otherwise it would be impossible for them to
-stem the stream. The fish we caught that day made a most welcome
-addition to our larder, as they are delicious eating.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- FISHING WITH HAND-NET ON THE UPPER WATERS OF THE ST. JOSEPH RIVER.
-]
-
-From a scientific point of view we did not gain much by our expedition
-to the St. Joseph River. Every day the skies were leaden, and during the
-whole time of our stay we saw no sun. Butterflies were scarcely more
-plentiful than they had been at Dinawa, and once, after a whole
-morning’s work, Harry had only secured two—fine specimens, no doubt, but
-even at that an insufficient reward for the time spent. Every night we
-kept the lamp going, but the moths were very scarce, although our camp
-was in the heart of the forest.
-
-Our life at St. Joseph River, however, was not to be all tranquillity.
-Once we had an alarm which fortunately degenerated into an incident of
-pure comedy, although it might have been very serious. At nightfall, one
-evening, a native boy, who had gone out shooting, had not returned, and
-we began to grow very anxious about him. At eight o’clock, however, he
-came into camp in a state of considerable agitation and bringing a
-strange tale of a pig. He had shot a tusker with No. 9 shot, but had
-only wounded it, and the animal charged him, whereupon he had thrown
-away his gun and run up a tree. Then the pig sat down over against him
-and laid siege to him, and our poor friend abode in the tree for several
-hours. Finally, however, the pig’s wound, which was over his eye, so
-blinded him with blood that he raised the siege in disgust and made off
-to his fastnesses.
-
-As time went on the rumours of war increased, and one day three natives
-came in from the village of Mi-Mi, six hours’ journey higher up the
-mountains, on the top of a ridge. They came from the chief of Baw-boi, a
-fierce warrior, who kept all the small villages round him in abject
-terror. His emissaries conveyed to me a most agreeable message, that if
-we and our followers should honour him with a visit at Mi-Mi, he would
-kill my men, and have the pleasure of cooking and eating our heads—a
-compliment, presumably, to the superiority of European brains. I had
-fully intended to visit him, but after this token of cordiality I
-refrained, so that the menu of the chief of Baw-boi’s regal banquet has
-not yet included the tempting item, “braised brains of Pratt.” After the
-chief’s intimation I kept fires going all night at both ends of the
-camp, but it was not necessary to post a stricter watch than usual, for
-three or four of my men always kept awake in their hammocks during the
-dark hours. This precaution is, in fact, so natural to savages that they
-never need to be reminded of its necessity. We heard that the chief of
-Baw-boi had placed his village in a complete state of defence, had
-excavated a trench 18 feet wide all round, and had erected a stockade.
-The effect of these hostile preparations on the weaker villages round we
-were to learn later from Sam, who was, at this time, a day’s journey
-higher up the river carrying on collecting work for me.
-
-The days seemed very long from lack of occupation, and the nights also,
-for we could not sleep for the roar of the St. Joseph River.
-Occasionally there were amusing incidents. One of my men, Gaberio, had a
-brilliant inspiration. He thought he would shoot fish with a rifle, and
-was allowed to go and try; but not only were they too quick for him,
-but, of course, the water deflected the ball, and the refraction of
-light through water makes a true aim impossible. Gaberio, who had no
-knowledge of natural science, covered his defeat by another excuse—
-“Water too deep,” said Gaberio.
-
-We found here some indication of rudimentary game laws existing among
-the Papuans. Round this region dwelt certain chiefs, in whose territory
-grew the play-trees of the _raggiana_ or red bird of paradise. These
-gentlemen intimated to us that any one who came to shoot the _raggiana_
-must pay them a fee, as the birds, by virtue of their coming to play in
-their trees, were their property.
-
-As the natives had little to do in camp, they used to sit round Harry,
-watching him with the greatest interest while he posted his diary, and
-exclaiming at intervals, “mallelee lo-pi-ang” (good writing). It is most
-singular that they should have had a word for writing, for I found no
-trace among them even of picture writing, if we except the markings on
-the “bau-bau” or pipe; but it is probable that they had some means of
-communication by scratching on bark, otherwise the existence of the term
-seems to be inexplicable.
-
-At length I saw that a further stay at the St. Joseph was impracticable.
-A flood came down and washed away our bridge, and it was with no great
-reluctance that we struck our camp and returned to Dinawa. On the way we
-repassed the village of Fa-lo-foida, which stands on the top of a
-conical hill surrounded by precipices. It was strongly stockaded, and we
-had a stiff clamber to get to the top. To enter the stockade we had to
-pass through the outer native house before gaining access to the centre
-of the village, a sort of compound. The stockade was closely built, only
-a few bars being left loose for ingress and egress, and the entrance
-could easily be shut in case of attack.
-
-A march lasting from 6 A.M. till 12.30 P.M. brought us back to Dinawa,
-where we found all well and in good order, except our plants and one of
-the birds. A “magnificent,” a really beautiful specimen of that species
-of paradise bird, which one of my boys had brought in, and which we had
-hoped to keep in a cage, had died, probably because when its captor
-brought it into camp he slung it head downwards from a pole, and kept it
-in that position several hours. We were heartily sorry to lose so fine
-an example of the _kellelo_, as the Papuans call that variety.
-
-Two days after our return to Dinawa camp, Sam rejoined us. He had much
-to tell, for the times had been rather stirring with him. My head-man as
-well as I had received the polite attentions of the Baw-boi chieftain,
-who had sent in to say that he was not afraid of Sam and his gun, and
-that he would cut off his head and eat him. After this overture Sam was
-careful to camp at the bottom of the hill, but our adversary did not
-give up hopes of a Cingalese dinner. A message came from another village
-that if Sam would go there he would be presented with a pig; but he knew
-the Papuan too well. He replied to the messengers that if they had a pig
-they should bring it into camp. Of course no pig came.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- A ROUGH BRIDGE WE MADE AT THE ST. JOSEPH RIVER.
-]
-
-From Sam we learned further that the Fa-lo-foida people, through fear of
-the Baw-boi people, had cut the suspension bridge, and that the natives
-farther up the St. Joseph River, on hearing of the tyrant’s warlike
-preparations, had left their villages and had settled on the site of the
-camp I had just quitted. Their object was, of course, to be near
-friendly Fa-lo-foida, which would in time of stress be to them as a
-fenced city. This incident led to the formation of quite a new township,
-and before I left Dinawa for good my old camp on the St. Joseph had
-become a considerable village. It was a curious example of the way in
-which political necessity affected the _locale_ of village communities.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER VII
- _GOOD-BYE TO DINAWA_
-
-A Beautiful New Orchid discovered and described—Drought continues—
-Sufferings of the Natives—I practise as a Physician—Queer Native
-Diagnosis—Gaberio, an Intelligent Native, goes collecting on his own
-Account—How we kept touch—The Wireless Telegraph of the Wilds—We
-determine to take our Specimens to the Coast—Methods of Preservation and
-Packing—Gaberio returns—He tells of the Murder of one of his Boys—
-Hardships of Camp Life—Food and Ammunition fail—We try Cockatoo Soup—A
-Visit from a Fine Hill Tribe, the Ibala—They brighten the Last Days of
-our Stay—Gorgeous Sunsets at Dinawa—The Ibala People return according to
-Contract to act as Carriers—We depart—Trials of the March to the Coast—A
-Mishap at Sea—Our Fine Herbarium ruined with Salt Water—Port Moresby
-once more.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER VII
- GOOD-BYE TO DINAWA
-
-
-Among the scientific specimens I brought back to Dinawa was a new
-_phallonopsis_ which I had discovered near Fa-lo-foida as we returned
-from our camp on the St. Joseph. This orchid is one of the superb
-treasures that occasionally reward the seeker as he passes through the
-wilds of New Guinea. It was found growing in the fork of a tree, where
-it had plenty of shade and a rich damp bed of moss and leaves. The
-leaves were a very brilliant dark green, and on the spray, which was
-quite 3 feet long, grew thirty magnificent white flowers of exquisite
-fragrance. Each specimen must have measured 2½ inches in diameter when
-the sepals and petals were extended. Its whiteness fulfilled the most
-rigid canons of the orchid fancier, for in judging orchids there are
-whites and whites. The value is determined by substance. You may get a
-white that is very satisfactory, but there is a thick waxiness of
-blossom that gives to a plant the very highest value, and this
-delightful specimen was as near the ideal as anything I have ever seen.
-It had, of course, pseudo-bulbs, and did not live on the tree, which is
-merely used as a means of support, and the plant draws its nourishment
-from the humidity of the atmosphere.
-
-Once more we settled down to the routine life of the camp, but it became
-plainer every day that, as there was no sign of the drought breaking up,
-there was very little hope of satisfactory work until another year. The
-skies were still brazen, and vegetation was failing more and more. The
-sweet potato crop had utterly failed. Those in store had long been
-consumed, and the natives were absolutely starving round us. It was no
-use for them to plant another crop of sweet potatoes until the rain
-should come, and they were wandering sadly all over the forest seeking
-what sustenance they could. Their strength was failing, and their
-privations were beginning to tell in terrible emaciation. It was pitiful
-to see the starving creatures come into camp, most of them mere skin and
-bone. Their children, of course, felt the pinch hardest, and there were
-many deaths. To see their condition one could hardly believe that they
-would ever recover, but they bore it all with a wonderful stoicism.
-Occasionally they would try to catch a pig in their corrals.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- NATIVE WOMEN AT DINAWA.
-
- The background is the roof and side of the author’s house.
-]
-
-The Dinawa people would also come to me for medicine, and would
-constitute me their physician for small complaints, such as headache,
-but I had to be very careful in this respect, for I found out that often
-they wanted medicine when nothing was the matter. This recalls to me an
-amusing incident of this period connected with my minor Æsculapian
-dealings. One morning Doboi, Martu, and Ow-bow came in, saying that
-Doboi’s mother was ill. On being questioned as to her symptoms, they
-told me that she was aching all over her body, and her head was
-particularly painful. Beyond these details we could not find out
-anything, and as the woman was some distance off, and it was not
-convenient to go that day, we gave them a headache compound and sent
-them off with it. Later in the afternoon the boys returned and told us
-that Ow-bow’s mother was dead, but the tidings were not so alarming as
-at first appeared; for they added that “her head was dead but her
-stomach was alive,” from which I understood that she was unconscious.
-The neighbouring Roman Catholic missionary, on hearing this, said that
-he would go over the following day. These cases were not new to him; in
-fact, he told us that fainting was quite common. Obviously, the dead
-head and the live stomach was a simple instance of swooning.
-
-During this time we had permitted our man Gaberio—whom I have already
-mentioned as being with us at the St. Joseph River—to go off on his own
-account collecting butterflies and birds. Gaberio was a Papuan whom I
-had engaged at Port Moresby. He was very intelligent, capable, and
-quick, and to his other qualities he added a knowledge of pigeon
-English. I mention him chiefly because the fact of his absence brought
-home to us with considerable force the value of that extraordinary
-system of intercommunication prevailing among the Papuans, which may
-well be called the wireless telegraphy of the wilds. For some time
-Gaberio was, as one might expect in such a region, entirely beyond our
-ken, and although we knew he could take care of himself very well, as
-the days went on, and our departure was approaching, we felt that we
-should like to have tidings of him.
-
-One morning, while we were writing home, we heard the natives calling
-from hill to hill. In that pure air their voices carry magnificently for
-a great distance, and village answers village with perfect ease from
-ridge to ridge. A little later the natives came in and told us that
-Gaberio was at a village called Kea-ka-mana, on the northern slope of
-the hill beyond us. It appeared that he was coming back by the same
-route as he had gone, and they told us that he expected to reach camp
-the next day. We thought at the time that he might go from Kea-ka-mana
-to the Kebea, but the natives said no, so we surmised that he must have
-a good collection of butterflies and birds, for he had had fine weather—
-finer, indeed, than Sam, who after all had got together quite a fine
-number of specimens. This news set us quite briskly to the work of
-preparation for our departure, for as soon as Gaberio should have
-returned we determined to make all speed down to Epa. The next day we
-were on the look-out for Gaberio, but he did not arrive, so we concluded
-that he had either gone to the Kebea or was remaining at Kea-ka-mana
-collecting. We filled up the day with active preparations for breaking
-up the camp, and, of course, our chief care was our collections.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- THE WIRELESS TELEGRAPHY OF NEW GUINEA.
-
- The natives shout their news from hill-top to hill-top, thus conveying
- it with amazing rapidity.
-]
-
-The first precaution was to take measures for the preservation of our
-moths and birds, so we made deep trays from the logs we had already sawn
-and held over from our house-building, each tray being strong enough to
-resist concussion, for as it would be carelessly carried, swung on a
-long bamboo, and allowed to dash against trees and other obstacles, the
-antennæ and legs of our specimens would be easily jarred, and very
-probably shaken off. The butterflies did not require such care, for each
-specimen was wrapped in paper and laid in sago boxes. Inside the wooden
-cases we placed the moth boxes proper, and in other two cases we laid
-our birds. Outside everything we pasted paper, treated with arsenic, to
-keep out insects when we should come to the lower ground, for the tiny
-ants at Port Moresby are legion and can penetrate the smallest aperture;
-once the ants enter a naturalist’s collection, woe betide it! Our only
-trouble during these packing operations was that we had not any nails
-small enough, for the huge ones we had brought from the coast very often
-split the wood.
-
-During our last fourteen days at Dinawa we had one small gleam of good
-fortune in our collecting, for, curiously enough, we had quite a run of
-good nights with the moths. The nights were dark and misty, and we very
-often had sufficient success to encourage us to remain on the verandah
-and work until the small hours.
-
-The second morning after the day we had our first news of Gaberio there
-was more calling, and shortly we heard that our follower was still at
-Kea-ka-mana, and that he had after all decided to go to the Kebea, and
-would return that way. The next day, while we were hard at work on our
-packing, we heard that Gaberio was on the Kebea—very pleasant news—for
-he was right in the heart of the best locality for the blue bird of
-paradise and for _heterocera_. There was another reason why this news
-was encouraging, and that was that a native feast was pending at
-Kea-ka-mana, and we had feared that Gaberio might be tempted to waste
-his time there in savage orgies. According to the latest intelligence,
-Gaberio would still be absent four or five days, and as he was in such a
-fine collecting country we hoped he would stay out to the end of his
-tether. Gaberio, however, did not fulfil our expectations in this
-respect, for the next day, shortly after noon, we heard that he was not
-at the Kebea at all, but that he was approaching the village on the
-ridge opposite, about 500 or 600 feet above Dinawa. Three hours later
-the intelligence department lied. It announced that Gaberio was at hand,
-the fiction being invented, no doubt, out of the savage’s fondness for
-creating a little pleasurable expectation. Unconsciously, however,
-Gaberio himself disproved the story, for we heard his gun far away on
-the heights, and we were able to locate him. Before nightfall we knew
-that he was really at the village first mentioned, for we could clearly
-distinguish his tent.
-
-The next morning, September 21, both Harry and I slept late, for we had
-had an extremely heavy day. While we were still in bed we heard a shot
-from Gaberio, whom we welcomed back about eleven o’clock. He brought a
-really good collection, which included three blue birds of paradise and
-four longtails. Gaberio’s news, however, was not all good, for he had to
-report that one of his boys had been murdered. Whether the chief of
-Baw-boi had a hand in it, or whether there was a private reason for the
-crime, I cannot say. It was not on the Baw-boi side of the river, so
-perhaps if it was not fortune of war it may have been misfortune of
-love, for the eternal feminine is as potent in Papua for evil as she has
-been in other lands since Eden or Troy was lost. Be that as it may, the
-lad, a carrier from the village of Kowaka, about a day’s journey from
-Dinawa, went out from camp at Ta-poo-a one night into the forest, and
-there the adversary overtook him. It is probable that he was laid wait
-for, or he may merely have fallen to the spear of some wandering
-marauders. The natives in camp heard his cry and were speedily on the
-spot, but it was too late. He had been speared through the cheek, and
-his jugular vein had been severed. In a very few minutes he died. The
-victim’s own kindred came in to take charge of the body, arriving even
-before Gaberio’s messenger could reach their village, so swift and
-mysterious is the communication of news in New Guinea.
-
-Now that Gaberio was back we were more than ever anxious to leave, for
-our provisions were running very low, and we were living principally on
-cockatoo soup. To make matters worse we had almost run out of
-ammunition, and for some time not even a pigeon broke the monotony of
-our poor fare. Occasionally we procured one or two sweet potatoes, but
-the natives were naturally very unwilling to sell them. A further
-difficulty stared us in the face, for the exhaustion of the natives
-through famine was now so great that I did not know how we were to get
-our baggage down to the coast, but relief dropped, if not from the
-clouds, at least from the hills.
-
-One day we heard that the people of Ibala, who had heard of the white
-men’s coming, had been sufficiently overcome with curiosity to make the
-journey from their distant home to visit us. At that home of theirs, far
-away on one of the greater mountain sides of the Owen Stanley range, I
-had often gazed with wonder and all the explorer’s longing. Some five or
-six days’ journey to the north towered a great and mysterious peak,
-higher than Mount Yule, the northern slopes of which I imagine were in
-German territory. Close to this mountain was a range of low foot-hills,
-bare of trees, but clothed, as far as we could make out through our
-glasses, with rich pasturage, and it seemed an ideal spot for some
-future stock-breeder in New Guinea, for such open spaces for
-grazing-grounds are uncommon in the island. From these foot-hills there
-rose continually into the clear air countless columns of pale blue
-smoke, telling of a numerous population. On the mountain the forests
-hung dense to the summit, but the strangest thing of all was that
-through these masses of trees there ran what seemed like a drive, rising
-straight to the highest ridge, its sides as sharply and clearly marked
-as though it had been cleared by the hand of man. There were no
-straggling trees dotted here and there at irregular intervals from the
-sides. The forest left off sharply in an ascending line, but the space
-seemed to extend for at least 300 yards, and then the forest began
-again, being as clearly defined as the side of a well-built street. On
-the very summit we could make out through our glasses the presence of
-giant araucarias, of which I obtained some specimens from Sam, who,
-while absent on one of his short expeditions, sent a native up the
-mountain for seedlings. I hoped that one of these might find a home in
-some British collection, but, unfortunately, it died of the drought.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- NATIVES OF ENUMAKA IN THE OWEN STANLEY RANGE.
-]
-
-It was from that region that the Ibala people hailed, and certainly, had
-the difficulties of transport not been so great, I should long ere this
-have visited them in their fastnesses. These fine northern men entered
-camp very shyly, and sat down with great diffidence. In appearance they
-were really handsome. Each man stood 5 feet 8 inches on an average; all
-were of fine physique and of a rich copper colour. Their women, of whom
-they brought a few, were not quite so tall. They were all in full
-finery, the men decorated with feathers, their faces painted in regular
-stripes with the juice of a scarlet berry. Between each red stripe ran a
-line of charcoal to set off the colour. A few of them wore the
-transverse pencil of tapering shell thrust through the septum of the
-nose, a form of decoration much affected by Papuan dandies. The women’s
-chief article of apparel was the customary dogs’ teeth necklace.
-
-At first our visitors did not ask for anything, but talked in a
-desultory way through Ow-bow, who knew their language. Later in the
-afternoon, however, they proffered a request for some tobacco. Here was
-my opportunity. These admirable fellows, who had come from a region
-where there was no famine and were in the pink of condition, were just
-the very material I wanted for my journey. Accordingly, I said that they
-should receive tobacco on condition that, on their being called by
-wireless telegraphy, they would return and carry me to Ekeikei. They
-gave me their word, and I took the risk of their keeping it. They
-received their tobacco, but were in no apparent hurry to depart. In
-fact, they stayed two whole days, got over their first shyness, and
-cheered us up wonderfully—indeed, it was “roaring camp!” Growing bolder,
-they pried into everything, and the house was always full. There was
-great coming and going with the Dinawa people, with whom the Ibala
-people were related by marriage, and the nights were musical with
-unceasing mountain choruses.
-
-Nothing would content them but they must see everything that the white
-men possessed, and it was very amusing to watch the men calling the
-women’s attention to anything that particularly attracted them. They
-felt our clothes and looked with curiosity at our photographs. In their
-power of appreciating and understanding a picture, one could realise how
-much higher in the social scale they were than their neighbours, the
-Australian aborigines, to whom drawing was unintelligible. They would
-pick out the portraits of Dinawa characters, and exclaim with great
-delight, “Ow-bow—Doboi—Martu,” as the case might be. I gave some
-additional tobacco to each man who would consent to stand for his
-photograph, but they never quite got over their shyness of the camera.
-Sometimes, when I had got everything fixed and ready, my sitter would
-get up and walk slowly away; some of the women faced the lens, but even
-when doing so, they would often cover their faces. Our visitors did not
-understand guns, so we took care not to frighten them with firearms.
-
-On the third day, about ten in the morning, they announced that they
-were going. They got together the bags in which a Papuan carries his
-effects, packed up their new acquisitions, and did a little business
-with the Dinawa people in small articles I had traded with the
-villagers, such as matches, tobacco, or an axe, the greatest of
-treasures—for “trade,” in the Papuan sense, had not reached Ibala. I
-myself made a few purchases from them, chiefly of clubs, for which I
-gave in exchange some small knives. To the Dinawa people they gave some
-sugar-cane, which was greedily snapped up by our destitute neighbours.
-Then they formed up, shook hands most cordially with us all, took the
-route, and disappeared into the forest, a party of men in front, the
-women in the centre carrying the loads, and another party of braves
-bringing up the rear. For a long time their shouts came echoing back to
-us through the trees. It was a most pleasant interlude, and when these
-cheerful fellows were gone we felt the camp almost painfully quiet.
-
-One or two incidents occurred to break the monotony of the remaining
-days. While I was collecting, close to the Aculama, I heard the
-missionary dog barking in great excitement, and discovered that he had
-seen a tremendous snake. This I shot in the head and brought into camp,
-where, on measuring it, I found it to be 18 feet long and 4 inches in
-diameter. It was of a non-poisonous variety—one of those snakes that
-live on the small arboreal mammals. I still retain the skin and skeleton
-as trophies. Even minor incidents of these dull days seemed worthy of
-setting down, and I note in my diary that one day one of my native
-carriers, who was going off to the river, demanded a gun. When I
-explained to him that he could not have one, he remarked with great
-nonchalance, “Maw-mo-na yow valeo dorka”—“Enough, I understand very
-well,” and he went off contentedly without firearms.
-
-I must not conclude my account of Dinawa without mentioning what was
-perhaps the greatest of its natural attractions—the almost overpowering
-magnificence of its sunsets. From the ridge I have watched every variety
-of colour, ranging from amber, gold, and orange, through purple and
-violet, to delicate shades of mauve, green, and pink—in fact, every hue
-of the prismatic spectrum was flung in magnificent profusion across the
-sky from horizon to zenith. On certain nights the whole landscape would
-be bathed in a glow of reflected crimson. It seemed as if the world were
-on fire. Even the vegetation was dyed a vivid red, and as the rim of the
-sun gradually disappeared, the tints melted to paler shades before they
-vanished. A brief period of starless twilight succeeded, and then the
-firmament was gemmed with a million sparkling points, and the tropic
-night reigned serene in its marvel and mystery. Many and many a time I
-have sat in rapt enjoyment of that gorgeous spectacle, watching the
-constellations wheel westward until the dawn overtook and hid them.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- VEGETATION AT DINAWA.
-
- Some of the tree ferns grow to a height of 40 feet.
-]
-
-The day for our departure now began to draw very near. All the specimens
-were safely packed, but the question of transport pressed more and more
-heavily. From the Dinawa people, as I have noted, little help was to be
-expected. The fittest of the men were abroad in the forest on foraging
-expeditions, and when we asked the women to carry for us, they replied
-that they could not come while their husbands were away. We sent out our
-boys to see what they could do in the surrounding country, but they
-invariably came back to report that they could recruit very few men. We
-ourselves, after a great deal of wearisome tramping from village to
-village, managed to enlist a meagre band of five fairly able-bodied
-assistants, but our party was still very inadequate. This was on
-September 22. A few days earlier, in pursuance of the compact the Ibala
-people had made with me, I had set the telegraph in motion, and told
-Fa-lo-foida to call up Kea-ka-mana, Kea-ka-mana to call up Tapua, and so
-on stage by stage to the distant home of my picturesque mountaineers, to
-tell them that the time had come to redeem their promise and earn the
-tobacco advanced on personal security alone. The calling accordingly
-began, and in less than ten minutes Ibala of the five days’ journey had
-received my summons. During the afternoon the answer arrived. Ibala was
-willing and would come. Accordingly, close to the time fixed for our
-departure—September 23—we were cheered by the return of our merry
-friends, who came like the honourable gentlemen they were to discharge
-their obligation.
-
-Even with this reinforcement we were still undermanned, and decided to
-start with only half the baggage, leaving Gaberio behind to see to the
-despatch of the other half when the bearers should be sent back. On
-September 23, at 9 A.M., we started for Ekeikei. At twelve we halted at
-Madui, where the natives wished to sleep; but this, of course, was out
-of the question, so we pushed on. As far as Madui the drought still
-prevailed. After that point it was damp, but not wet. In one way the
-drought had served us well, for all the leeches had died and we were
-saved from that pest; but the scrub-itch was worse than ever, especially
-after we passed Ekeikei. We reached the Bamboo Camp after a hard march
-at 7 P.M., and both we and our followers were thoroughly tired out. Next
-day we went by way of Ekeikei to Epa, when our friends from Ibala went
-back, having performed their undertaking. We found Epa terribly parched,
-and it presented a very different aspect to that which we had seen three
-months earlier. Thence we proceeded to Oo-fa-fa, where our old
-acquaintance Mavai saw us through with our impedimenta. We travelled by
-boat to Pokama, where we got on board a small cutter and set sail for
-Port Moresby. Unfortunately, we encountered very heavy weather, and had
-to beat up to our destination under a lashing south-east monsoon. We
-shipped many seas, and thus lost our fine herbarium, all the plants in
-which were blackened by salt water. This was an irreparable misfortune,
-and most disheartening after the tremendous trouble we had taken in
-collecting and drying our specimens of Papuan flora.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER VIII
- _INACTION AND AN EXCURSION_
-
-Period of Inaction at Port Moresby—Christmas in New Guinea—A Scratch
-Dinner—A Christmas Privilege for Cingalese to obtain Spirits—Curious
-Effect on One Individual—A Noteworthy Character—An Excursion to Hula—A
-Fisher Community—A Piebald People—Picturesque Night Fishing by Flare
-Light—Fishermen often Killed by Gare-fish—Hula Houses—Various Traits of
-Native Life—A Walk round Hood’s Bay—Traces of Initiatory Rites at Kalo—
-The Kalo Houses described—On to Kerapuna—A Shooting Expedition—We lose
-the Trail—Class Distinctions at Kerapuna—Return to Port Moresby by Sea—A
-Perilous Voyage in a Little Canoe—Tragic Death of Flood, the Naturalist.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER VIII
- INACTION AND AN EXCURSION
-
-
-As there was really nothing to be done until the beginning of the year,
-we settled down at Port Moresby in some spare rooms which Sam, my
-Cingalese head-man, let me have in his house.
-
-We occupied our time with the despatch of our collections. The
-herbarium, of course, had perished, but the moths, butterflies, and
-birds had come safely down from Dinawa. We did not disturb the boxes
-already packed, but merely stowed them in large cases, packing them with
-cocoanut fibre and straw to resist concussion. Each box was tin-lined,
-and on receiving its full complement was soldered up.
-
-For the procuring of empty cases I was greatly obliged to the courtesy
-of Mr. Ballantine, the Curator of the Intestate Office at Port Moresby.
-This work occupied us in all over a fortnight, and finally we despatched
-our collections to England by way of Australia.
-
-Thereafter the days were very dull and uneventful. Christmas was fast
-approaching, but there was very little hope of its being a merry one—for
-us, at any rate. The stores of provisions were running very short, and
-our Christmas dinner was probably one of the queerest that was ever set
-before an exiled Britisher. I left the task of preparing the meal
-entirely to Sam, who managed somehow to procure some wallaby, a piece of
-bacon, and biscuits. Instead of pudding we had a Cingalese plum-cake,
-made by Sam’s daughter, and a glass of claret rounded off the banquet.
-Harry and I dined together on the verandah, and remembered absent
-friends, but we were not very festive.
-
-There is one curious observance of the Port Moresby Christmas which may
-be worthy of mention here. At that season any Cingalese resident in the
-place may, on obtaining a Government permit, be served with spirits at
-the Stores.
-
-The effect of this privilege on one Port Moresby worthy was truly
-deplorable. I saw him in the road, and I have little doubt that he saw
-more than one of me, but then, of course, it was a year since he had
-permission before. He was quite a character, and his residence was as
-peculiar as himself. It was built entirely of flattened paraffin tins
-and other oddments, a style of architecture which I have also noticed in
-the West Indies.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- A PIEBALD TRIBE: THE MOTU-MOTU PEOPLE OF HOOD’S BAY, AND A TYPICAL
- KALO HOUSE.
-
- The piebald people are one of the mysteries of New Guinea, and their
- origin is unexplained. The spear in the warrior’s hand is made of
- hard redwood, sharpened, and has no metal. The house is built on an
- open wooden framework, and the flooring of the dwelling-room begins
- at the bottom of the closed-in gable. On this inflammable floor,
- within the thatch of flag-grass, they actually have a fire on a mud
- hearth. The slanting pole is a ladder for the inhabitants. In some
- cases they have little ladders for the dogs.
-]
-
-Another Port Moresby character was Weaver, the greengrocer; he has a
-history, but no man knows it, and it is popularly reported that he has a
-family in Australia. He has been in New Guinea for some years, and lives
-quite alone in an isolated district where he built a house and took up
-some land. He stands 6 feet 2 inches, and is a curious eccentric fellow
-whom nobody understands. He does not care for visitors, and has even
-been known to threaten distinguished personages with his gun when they
-dared to knock at his door! Twice a week Weaver brings in his
-vegetables, packed on two ponies, and sells them to Europeans at Port
-Moresby. It is said that he is accumulating money. He is perfectly
-independent, and quite a character; utterly illiterate, he has the
-dogged opinions which usually accompany lack of education. He believes
-in himself, has no one to help him in his work, and tells you quite
-frankly that he thinks _he_ could run New Guinea better than any one. On
-all subjects under the sun the opinion of Weaver is absolutely right and
-that of the world absolutely wrong.
-
-As the days dragged on Harry and I thought we would vary the monotony of
-our life, and obtain a change of diet, by taking a small excursion down
-to Hula, the great fishing-place. By the courtesy of a trader, who was
-going down in a whaleboat, we obtained a passage. A voyage of a few
-hours took us down, and we found the village fairly large, built like
-Hanuabada, only most of the houses stood in the water on piles. The
-shore is thickly fringed with cocoanut plantations. The people, who
-belong to the Motuan tribe, as those of Hanuabada do, live by supplying
-the inland natives with fish. They go down to the fishing-ground, about
-two miles from shore, in small dug-out canoes, and this industry affords
-a very delightful touch of colour to the scenery of this part of the
-Papuan coast. The fishing is done at night, and just as the sun sinks
-the canoes come up past Hula in great crowds. In each boat are four or
-five fishermen, who pole up the shallows and paddle when they come to
-deeper water. As the darkness deepens the flotilla suddenly bursts into
-flame, for their method of attracting gare-fish, which is their chief
-quarry, is by burning huge flares of dried palm leaves. Each of these
-flares is made up of a considerable bundle of leaves, and the men
-brandish them about in their hands. The light lasts for a considerable
-time. The effect of these many fires, reflected in long tracks on the
-water, is extremely picturesque. The fishing lasts all night, and at
-dawn the fleet returns with its catch.
-
-The work is not unattended with danger, for sometimes the gare-fish,
-which are armed with a sharp sword-like projection of bone from the
-front part of the head, will, as they leap in blind terror of the light,
-strike the fishermen and kill them. The natives set up a stick in the
-water where any one has been killed by gare-fish.
-
-Another interesting feature of Hula was the presence there of a piebald
-people. For the most part their bodies were brown, but they were marked
-with pinkish patches unevenly distributed. It is not improbable that
-this marking might be due to a disease, contracted from a too constant
-fish diet, but if it were a disease I could not discover that it gave
-any discomfort. Against this theory must be set this fact, that I
-observed one man in whom the light markings predominated. In fact, he
-was quite fresh-coloured, like a European, and had light hair. These
-piebald people were not a class apart from the rest of the Hula
-villagers, but shared their life in every respect.
-
-The piles on which the Hula houses are built look quite insufficient to
-support the superstructure. The pitch of the gables is not always
-uniform in the same house, and in these cases the ridge-pole is not
-horizontal.
-
-Before we came to Hula, however, we had paid a visit to Kappa-Kappa, one
-of the very few localities in New Guinea that show any immediate result
-of missionary effort and of a direct attempt to introduce the methods of
-civilisation. There resides the agent of the London Missionary Society,
-Dr. Laws, who has been perhaps longer in British New Guinea than any
-other white man, for his stay now extends over thirty years. The
-missionary has a fine house standing on a slight elevation and
-commanding a magnificent view to the north and south. A remarkably fine
-road leads up to Dr. Laws’ residence, and 300 yards away is the
-Christian village, built in detached houses along the rise and forming a
-regular street. We were very much amused to notice that the houses were
-all numbered, and that many of them had Scotch names inscribed on a
-little piece of wood fastened over the door.
-
-There were about sixty houses in all, and a really fine church and
-school. This last we visited and heard the children sing. They gave not
-at all a bad performance for coast natives, to whose discordant tones I
-have already alluded, and if my good friends, the mountain people, with
-their beautiful voices and their fine idea of music, had had the same
-training, the effect would have been little short of charming. We saw
-the place at a slight disadvantage, for the drought had greatly withered
-the vegetation, and Dr. Laws’ fine orange trees were all dead. The
-natives, I was glad to see, wore their ordinary dress, and no ridiculous
-attempt had been made to thrust them into European clothes. Dr. Laws did
-everything in his power to render our visit pleasant, and to him and his
-wife we are indebted for much kind hospitality. There is much that is
-enviable in his pleasant dwelling-place, and he seems to be on excellent
-terms with the natives. As I have elsewhere had occasion to remark, it
-is doubtful whether this generation of Papuans is capable of much
-spiritual enlightenment at the missionary’s hands, but the seeds of
-industrial progress at any rate are being sown, and the order and
-apparent prosperity of Kappa-Kappa say much for the work of the pioneer.
-There is no Paradise, however, without its serpent, and the scourge of
-Kappa-Kappa is the black snake, which attacks the natives.
-
-The poison is most virulent, and Dr. Laws told me that if he could see
-the sufferer immediately he could save him, but if only a few minutes
-elapse before help is available death must inevitably ensue within an
-hour. This snake also kills the missionary’s horses, which it invariably
-bites on the instep. He keeps the horses for his little trap, in which,
-at the close of our visit, he drove us down to the coast, a distance of
-about four miles.
-
-Besides the things I have mentioned, we found little else to interest us
-in Hula, and after a short stay we set off to walk round Hood’s Bay to
-Kalo, the next village of any importance, situated a little way from the
-coast. On the way we passed the little village of Babacca, the
-headquarters of a copra trader called Joher.
-
-Formerly Kalo was the centre of strange ceremonial dances, connected
-with the worship of the reproductive powers of Nature.
-
-Initiatory rites were celebrated, and the orgies taken part in by the
-young men and women were often of the most indecorous character. By the
-decree of a paternal Government these celebrations have now ceased to
-exist. It is possible that they were accompanied by cannibalism, but I
-am not aware that there is any proof of this. Descriptions are extant,
-but it is doubtful whether these have been given at first hand, for the
-natives would certainly not have admitted visitors to their mysteries.
-
-The houses at Kalo are the most substantial I saw in New Guinea. They
-were built upon 9–inch posts and were raised 10 or 11 feet off the
-ground. It was extraordinary to me how these posts were secured, the
-soil seemed so loose and sandy; about one-third distance up occurred a
-cross-piece, above which there were two others. The lower parallelogram
-thus formed was crossed by two diagonal pieces of bamboo, the third and
-upper parallelogram by one diagonal piece; these were the steps giving
-access to the house, and their arrangements will be easily understood by
-reference to the photograph. The third cross-piece, above which the
-gable is enclosed, marks the level of the floor. There was an open
-verandah at one end, and the house had only one room. The house was
-eaved, and was thatched with flag-grass, and the whole structure
-measured 30 feet by 15 feet. On the inflammable floor, within the
-thatch, they actually have a fire on a mud hearth. The strangest sight
-of all was the elaborate carvings hung up outside, and it was a singular
-thing that no two houses at Kalo bore carvings of the same pattern.
-
-We stayed only a few hours at Kalo, and then went on to Kerapuna, where
-we arrived about dusk after a long day’s march. At one point our advance
-was barred by a small river, very still and muddy and fringed with rank
-vegetation, the whole aspect of the place proclaiming it the haunt of
-the crocodile. It would have saved time had we swum across, but the mere
-look of the place obviously made it unwise to do so, so we fetched a
-slight détour until we came to a little village where we were able to
-hire a canoe.
-
-Kerapuna is a fairly large fishing village on the east side of Hood’s
-Lagoon, just within the entrance. It possesses its missionary, Mr.
-Pearce, who lives there with his wife in great isolation. It is many
-years since he has been home, and it is not often that a European knocks
-at his door. With him we found hospitality. He is pleasantly housed and
-seems very comfortable and is on good terms with the natives, to whose
-spiritual needs he ministers in a little hall. It is doubtful how far
-the Papuan can be reached through theological channels at this stage of
-his development. A great deal, however, can be done towards training him
-in the simpler industries.
-
-From Kerapuna we went out for a short shooting expedition in the flat,
-trackless forest that lies inland. The region is very gloomy; tall
-Pandanus trees with aërial roots and thickly matted branches obscure the
-daylight, but there is no dense undergrowth. There the gaura pigeon
-abounds, and we were fortunate enough to shoot some.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- A HOUSE IN THE VILLAGE OF KALO.
-
- The floor of the house is on a level with the eaves.
-]
-
-The little expedition, however, was rather uneventful, except at one
-point, where we discovered somewhat to our anxiety that we had lost the
-trail. The two natives we had brought with us went, one to the right and
-the other to the left, searching for it, and we kept shouting to each
-other all the time. At last, after a couple of hours’ search, we found
-the track, which would have been visible only to a Papuan, as there was
-no well-worn path. We required native guidance also to get us back to
-the creek where we had left our canoe.
-
-If there were no division between the piebald people and the ordinary
-inhabitants of Hula, at Kerapuna we noticed a curious class distinction,
-founded not on any physical peculiarity, but upon the mere question of
-occupation. One part of the village was occupied by the fisher tribe,
-the other part by a purely agricultural people. The latter were
-extremely lazy, and, as I have noted elsewhere, the lazier Papuan tribes
-are never fishermen, and always employ some more active people to do
-this work for them. The tillers of the soil and the spoilers of the sea
-hold rigidly aloof from one another at Kerapuna, and only meet on the
-common ground of an exchange of commodities—the fish being purchased for
-bananas and cocoanuts. Yet, strangely enough, the more active tribe was
-evidently there on sufferance, and was allowed to remain only because of
-the fish they supplied. Another remarkable point was, that the fishing
-populations dwelt on land and not on pile-built houses, as at Hula and
-Hanuabada. In this district we could get on without any other “trade”
-than tobacco.
-
-As there was nothing to tempt us to remain, and as Kerapuna, even at the
-best, was a dull place, we did not stay longer than four or five days. I
-was very anxious, too, to get back to Port Moresby to make my
-preparations for a second journey into the interior to resume my work.
-We determined to make the return journey by water, and accordingly hired
-a little canoe from a native, who, with a companion, came with us to act
-as our navigator.
-
-The little craft was hardly more than 18 inches wide, and just held the
-four of us in a rather cramped position. We set our course, which lay
-twenty miles across Hood’s Bay to Hula, and started about 10 A.M. in
-fine weather. When we had got about half-way, however, the wind rose,
-and a tremendous swell began to come in from the point where the reef
-opens seawards, and very soon the dug-out was dancing like a cork and
-was continually shipping seas, so that Harry and I had to bale
-constantly.
-
-I must say, however, that our natives knew how to handle their craft,
-and were very expert watermen. They kept the little square sail of
-matting under excellent control, and steered with the flat of a paddle
-from the side at the stern. Although they were very frightened, they did
-their best, and kept the canoe’s head up to the seas very neatly. For a
-time, I must confess, I myself was doubtful whether we should get
-through safely. We were dripping wet and in rather a sorry plight, but
-after rounding the point close to Hula we got into calmer water, and we
-landed safely, but very stiff and cold.
-
-Two or three days later we bade good-bye to Hula, and the same whaler’s
-trading boat that had got us down took us back to Port Moresby, where I
-at once set about active preparations for my second journey inland.
-
-On my return to Port Moresby I heard, to my great regret, the news of
-the death of Mr. Flood, the American naturalist. When I went up to
-Dinawa, while on my first journey, I left Flood in Port Moresby. Some
-time after he went up the Venapa River, seeking land shells. He was
-foolish enough to go alone, and his folly was the greater because he was
-very deaf. At length the authorities got alarmed about him, and Mr.
-Ballantine headed a search party, but the only trace of the naturalist
-was one of his camp fires. It is thought almost certain that he may
-either have strayed away and died of hunger, or he may have been
-devoured by a crocodile. It was not the first time that a party had gone
-out to seek Flood after his prolonged absence had given cause for alarm,
-and it was doubly absurd of him to go alone, because, even with Papuan
-attendants, it is difficult—as I myself have found—to pick up the trail
-when once it has been lost. I was much distressed about Flood, for he
-was a most unselfish enthusiast in the pursuit of science.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER IX
- _TOWARDS THE UNEXPLORED_
-
-Beginning of Furthest Journey into Unexplored Interior—The Everlasting
-Question of Carriers—Difficulties and Delays—Epa again—Curious Method of
-Water Supply—Mavai welcomes us back—He provides a Dubious Treat—Ekeikei—
-The Building of a Permanent Camp—An Elaborate Undertaking—House-building
-on a Large Scale—Ingenious Papuan Methods of Thatching—The Chief Kafulu
-proves Unneighbourly—He does not fulfil his Engagements—Ow-bow’s
-Embassy—My Deputy is robbed—Precautions in Camp against Attack—I go down
-to Kafulu and deal faithfully with him—He relents, and restores Ow-bow’s
-Goods—An Earthquake and Hurricane at Ekeikei.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER IX
- TOWARDS THE UNEXPLORED
-
-
-On January 1, 1903, Harry and I left Port Moresby on board Captain Pym’s
-vessel, the _Whaup_. This took us to Yule Island, and from that point we
-proceeded to Pokama, on the mainland. There we were met and entertained
-by Cavé, a hospitable Papuan woman, widow of Captain Williams, a trader.
-She has a very comfortable bungalow at Pokama, and keeps a small store,
-where she does business with passing traders, who are always welcome at
-her house. She also owns a small light-draught cutter, which brings
-sandalwood down from Bioto Creek, and this boat she is willing to let
-out to travellers. She also keeps up the beautiful gardens and fine
-mango trees planted by her husband, and she cultivates custard apples
-and a delightful fruit known as Soursop. It is the shape of a kidney and
-about the size of a pumpkin; within it is a mass of creamy pulp,
-surrounding black seeds. This pulp is most cooling, and it is
-accompanied by a pleasantly astringent acid juice, the whole fruit
-forming an ideal refreshment for the tropics.
-
-From Pokama we went by canoe to Yule Island, where we halted at the
-Sacred Heart Mission, and then went on to Aruopaka, where we stayed for
-several days in the house of Mr. Russell. Mr. Russell himself was
-absent, but we joined him later at Moa, one and a half hours’ row from
-Aruopaka, a voyage which we made in our host’s whaleboat. From Moa we
-passed by way of Inawee, Inawa, and Inawabia to Aipiana, the Government
-station, where Mr. Russell entertained us for five days. In the
-curiously-named villages just mentioned we tried to collect carriers,
-and at this juncture I sent Harry back to Pokama to bring on the goods
-we had left behind us, appointing to meet him at Bioto. During his
-absence Mr. Russell and I went to the southward through other villages
-Rarai and Nara, and picked up twenty more men. On our way through these
-southern villages we met Captain Barton, then the head of the native
-armed constabulary, and now the Administrator. With him I spent one
-night, and then pushed on to Bioto with my thirty bearers, who, as yet,
-had nothing to carry. To perform the journey adequately I really should
-have had a force of seventy. At Bioto we enlisted a few, but our numbers
-were still very insufficient. At 4 A.M. in the morning after my arrival
-at Bioto, Harry rejoined me, and during that day we began sending the
-baggage by relays to Epa. Harry had been enabled to bring all our
-remaining goods with him through the kindness of the Rev. Mr. Dauncey,
-who had lent him his whaleboat. With the help of the Chief Constable,
-who gave us the use of his canoe, we got the baggage along to Oo-fa-fa,
-from which point I was assisted by my old friend Mavai, who sent down
-carriers from Epa to take the stuff up to Ekeikei. At Bioto the
-mosquitoes were at this time a terror, and were so thick that one could
-hardly put food in one’s mouth or take an aim with a gun.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- THE VILLAGES OF ELEVADA AND HANUABADA.
-
- The latter is built on piles in the water. Its inhabitants are the
- potters of New Guinea.
-]
-
-While we passed through Epa on this occasion, I noticed specially the
-extraordinary method of water supply there in vogue. A spring which
-supplies the community was distant some twenty minutes’ walk down-hill,
-and twice every day, in the morning and just before dusk, the women went
-down to draw water. This they carried in long bamboos, measuring at
-least 12 feet. The partitions dividing the sections of bamboo had been
-knocked out with a long, hard stick, the bottom one was allowed to
-remain, and these light but unwieldy receptacles, capable of holding
-about thirty-six pints each, were taken to the spring and filled. The
-open end was plugged with a green leaf, and the women carried the
-vessels up-hill held slantwise over their shoulder. The bamboo was set
-up against a shady wall, beside the house door, and the method of
-procuring a small supply of water was comical in the extreme. Whenever
-you wanted a drink two people had to officiate; a native took hold of
-the bamboo by the lower end and you proceeded to the other. It was then
-gingerly lowered towards you, for the greatest care had to be taken not
-to tilt it too far, otherwise more water than you wanted would have come
-out with a rush and drenched you.
-
-On my reappearance at that village I was very heartily welcomed by the
-chief. I found him busily engaged in hunting the cassowary and the pig,
-and generally keeping up his reputation of a great sportsman.
-
-During this visit to Mavai, the excellent chief, who kept fowls,
-presented me with two eggs; these we boiled with lively anticipations of
-a treat, but we broke the shells only to discover that the eggs were of
-a remote antiquity. We passed them on, however, to Ow-bow, who received
-them with gratitude, for he regarded chicken in this form as a very
-great delicacy indeed.
-
-I purchased some sago from the chief, and when we got bearers together I
-started for Ekeikei. One day’s journey brought us to our destination,
-which was situated 1500 feet above sea level, on the foot-hills of the
-Owen Stanley range. This point I had already selected in my mind as the
-scene of my future labours, and I at once set about building a permanent
-camp. I chose the site in a part of the forest overlooking a fine
-valley, and we set to work speedily, felling the forest trees to make
-the necessary clearing. It was a big business, much bigger than founding
-our establishment at Dinawa, but I intended to erect much more permanent
-structures, which were to be built large enough not only to serve for
-scientific work, but as a depôt for expeditions to other districts. The
-house and two collecting verandahs were all in one building, one
-verandah facing the forest and the other the valley, so as to permit of
-work being carried on whatever the direction of the wind. The whole
-structure was built on poles 6 feet 6 inches off the ground, so that my
-natives could shelter, sling their hammocks, and take their meals below.
-This work occupied us three weeks, and in it we were assisted by Mavai’s
-people, who were helped by the villagers of the neighbouring chief,
-Kafulu. These came in to lend a hand for the sake of tobacco and other
-trade articles they needed.
-
-The best thatch to be obtained in Papua is the sago leaf, and of this
-the natives make roofs that are water-tight and very durable. At Ekeikei
-we adopted this method. Along the rafters of our house we ran horizontal
-bamboos, and instead of a ridge-pole roof we had two of these bamboos
-running from end to end a few inches apart. The frond of the sago leaf
-which we used for this purpose is at least 4 feet long; it measures 6
-inches at the base, and tapers to a point. To begin the thatch, one
-takes the leaf and bends it two-thirds away from the apex. One starts
-from the bamboo horizontal that lies nearest the eaves, and hooks the
-leaf over, laying the pointed end out. On the next higher bamboo one
-hooks over another leaf, similarly folded, so that its long pointed end
-far overlaps the other, and so on until the ridge of the roof is
-reached. The operation is thus repeated until the whole roof is
-thatched. The space between the two parallels which form the ridge-pole
-is finally covered with grass laid thickly across and across. The sago
-leaf is grooved laterally, and forms, as it were, a natural water-spout
-for carrying off the rain.
-
-So durable is this roof that after an absence of five months we found
-that our Ekeikei house was still water-tight. This thatch is, however, a
-great harbourage for cockroaches, and there must have been millions of
-them in our house. At night we could hear them rustling among the dry
-leaves. I could not ascertain that they had done any actual damage, and
-they had the grace not to fall down upon us.
-
-As soon as the camp was finished we settled down to our old routine of
-work, very similar to that observed during our stay at Dinawa, and for a
-time all went smoothly. But suddenly a cloud loomed upon our horizon in
-the shape of our neighbour Kafulu. This worthy, whose village was an
-hour’s journey off, had often visited the camp while the building was in
-progress. He was a very low type of Papuan, with a receding forehead and
-a face altogether ape-like. After his people, who helped me in my
-building operations, had been paid off, I did a little business with the
-chief himself, and ordered sago stalks for wattling the sides of the
-house. For these I paid in advance, but the sago was not forthcoming. I
-made no complaint at first, and this probably deceived him into thinking
-I might be treated with further contumely, for he suddenly began to
-threaten my boys, until at last they would no longer venture out into
-the forest to collect. Accordingly, I sent my trusty advocate Ow-bow and
-his wife down to Kafulu’s village to know the reason why he did not
-deliver the sago, which was several weeks overdue. Ow-bow was allowed to
-take a gun with him, but no cartridges, and his empty weapon evidently
-was not impressive. My emissary’s experience was painful; Kafulu did not
-take his life, but he took his effects. Now, every Papuan carries with
-him as his most cherished possession a little net-bag, containing a
-charming collection of oddments dear to the savage mind—his knife,
-tobacco, bamboo pipe, matches, which he had earned, betel-nut and gourd,
-and little trophies of the chase. All these Kafulu took from the
-unfortunate Ow-bow, as well as his blanket, his dogs’ teeth necklace,
-and other adornments. Thus bereft, Ow-bow executed a strategic movement
-to the rear, and returned to camp with his tale of wrong. Kafulu then
-sent in a polite message informing me that he had no intention of
-sending the sago, and further, that I was not to shoot bird, kangaroo,
-wallaby, or any game around my camp, for they were his animals;
-otherwise he would burn the camp and kill us all.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- NEW GUINEA HOUSE-BUILDING.
-
- Our house at Ekeikei under construction.
-]
-
-As matters stood thus, I considered that greater precautions were
-necessary, especially as I knew that Kafulu had recently broken into and
-robbed the mission-house at Ekeikei, for it was more than likely that a
-treacherous spear might, in the darkness, penetrate the thin sago walls
-of our house, and perhaps find its billet. We accordingly built around
-our beds an inner screen of 1½–inch bamboo poles, and even though a
-missile had penetrated the thin sago walls, it would have been stopped
-by this barricade.
-
-Matters did not improve, and accordingly, taking Harry and Sam with me,
-I determined to go down and try what a little plain personal dealing
-could accomplish with our agreeable neighbour. I found him in his
-village, sitting apart, smoking the bau-bau, and extremely surly. He
-gave us no greeting, in fact, took not the slightest notice of us, and
-continued to smoke stolidly. We sat down, and I at once opened the
-affair, Sam and Harry acting as my interpreters. I told Kafulu that
-unless he sent the sago at once, and returned Ow-bow’s goods, it would
-be necessary for me to bring pressure to bear on him. This was continued
-for three-quarters of an hour, entirely on my part, for it was not until
-that time had elapsed that Kafulu deigned to reply. He then remarked
-that he did not want me in the neighbourhood, and that he could not
-answer for it that his villagers would not wipe us out. At the end of an
-hour he showed some signs of relenting, but the victory was not yet won.
-The parley still continued, and Kafulu resumed his pipe, whereupon I
-gave him some tobacco, which he took without thanks. At the end of three
-hours certain arguments, which I thought proper to use, prevailed, and
-he produced some of Ow-bow’s goods. Ow-bow remarked that that was not
-all, whereupon Kafulu promised to send everything, to deliver the sago,
-and also that he would not frighten our collectors any more. With this
-assurance we shook hands upon it and I returned to camp.
-
-Two days after the sago arrived, and in four days the whole of Ow-bow’s
-possessions were returned. They were brought in by some of Kafulu’s
-villagers and handed to their owner without comment. Thereafter, as far
-as I could see, Kafulu lived a sober, righteous, and godly life. I am
-not sure, however, although he committed no overt act of hostility, that
-he was not the instigator of some trouble which I had at a later period
-with the Madui people.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- IN THE PRIMEVAL FOREST.
-]
-
-During our stay at Ekeikei we experienced an earthquake shock, not great
-but sufficiently alarming. There were two distinct shocks, which shook
-the house violently, and the phenomenon was peculiar inasmuch as it was
-not heralded by any preliminary rumblings as is usually the case. Many
-of the other atmospheric signs usually accompanying an earthquake were,
-however, present. There was a tremendous and oppressive heat with
-death-like stillness; the skies were inky black, and there was a perfect
-deluge of rain, so heavy that it could easily have been described as
-pouring down in bucketfuls. Then the heavens opened with what seemed to
-be rivers of lightning, for the discharges resembled great main streams
-with thousands of fiery affluents, and all around us the thunder crashed
-terrifically, seeming at times as if it were inside the house. For
-three-quarters of an hour there was no cessation of the din. A tree just
-below our verandah was struck and split from top to bottom, but
-fortunately no one was injured.
-
-After the worst of the storm had passed, a fierce hurricane came,
-tearing up the valley which our camp faced. We heard its roaring long
-before we felt its force. When it came it blew off some of the thatch of
-one of our buildings. We were to a certain extent protected from its
-full force by the large trees around us, and at the same time we were
-saved from the danger of falling trees, because, with a view to the
-emergencies of such storms, we had taken care to fell all the larger
-trees for a considerable distance around our camp. The effect of the
-oncoming wind heard at a distance had another weird parallel in the
-onset of rain storms, for we heard the rush and patter of a distant
-shower long before it was actually raining at our camp.
-
-At Ekeikei were swarms of wasps that haunted the low bushes, and
-concealed themselves under the leaves so cunningly that the traveller
-did not perceive them till he was actually upon them. Their bodies are a
-dark yellowish brown. At the least disturbance they all rise together in
-a buzzing cloud and take vengeance. The sting is severe, but the pain
-fortunately does not last long. It dies out in six or seven minutes,
-leaving a red lump which gradually subsides.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER X
- _UPS AND DOWNS_
-
-My man Sam goes to the Kebea to collect—We go to the Coast again with
-our Specimens—A Dreadful Night in Bioto Creek—A Crocodile River—A
-Tempestuous Voyage to Thursday Island—Fever—Return to Port Moresby—
-Adrift for Three Days in a Heavy Sea—A German Captain’s Thrilling Story
-of the Storm—We return to Ekeikei—A New Trouble—Epidemic of Measles
-among Native Followers—Harry goes off alone among Cannibals—Adventurous
-Journey of a Boy of Sixteen—Description of Native Village on a
-15–inch-wide Ridge.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER X
- UPS AND DOWNS
-
-
-The day after I had settled the business with Kafulu, I sent Sam on to
-the Kebea to collect Lepidoptera, so that we might be working two
-different localities and elevations at the same time. On April 26 Harry
-left Ekeikei to fetch Sam back with the collections he had made, for we
-had decided to go back to Hall Sound and send home our specimens, which
-the humid atmosphere was threatening to spoil. In due time they
-returned, and after I had examined the results of Sam’s labours, I
-arranged with him to return to Foula, where he had been collecting,
-while my son and myself went down to the coast.
-
-The journey down was not very eventful, but one night we spent at Bioto
-Creek will always remain memorable to us. At Bioto we put all our cases
-on board a canoe, and set out with two natives to navigate the overladen
-craft to Pokama. As we did not leave until late we were forced to spend
-the whole night in the creek. In our crazy vessel, weighed down almost
-to the water’s edge, for she had only three inches of free board, we lay
-close inshore, under dense mangrove trees. Sleep was impossible, for we
-were assailed by mosquitoes and other discomforts; added to this we had
-to endure the stench of mud, the hoarse cry of the mound-builder, the
-clacking of myriads of bivalves as the tide receded, the incessant rain,
-the inky blackness of the night, and the unmistakable presence of
-innumerable crocodiles. Fortunately we did not know then that only a
-short time before, near this place, two natives had had a desperate
-fight with a crocodile, which lifted one of them right out of their
-canoe; the other fought the crocodile gallantly, and managed to get his
-companion back into the boat, when the saurian, nothing daunted,
-returned to the attack, and seized the poor fellow again, dismembering
-him.
-
-Although we had not the knowledge of this accident to add to our
-troubles, that night in Bioto Creek, which we spent cramped up in the
-most uncomfortable position, was probably the most unenviable I have
-ever passed. Darkness fell at 6.30; at 3.30 A.M. we were very glad to
-welcome the moonrise, and saw the light gradually silhouette the dense
-matted branches of the mangrove. About 4 A.M. we left our anchorage, and
-the dawn saw us well on our voyage to Pokama. It was wonderful on our
-arrival there how soon, under the influence of a good bath, clean
-clothes, a white table-cloth, and a decent meal, we forgot the horrors
-of the night that had just passed.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- POLING LAKATOIS (RAFTS OF CANOES) OUT FROM THE SHORE.
-]
-
-From Pokama we went on to Hall Sound, where we were fortunate enough to
-find the ketch _St. Andrew_ about to sail, and on board that boat we
-secured a passage. Setting out on the 4th May, we were often badly
-becalmed, and on the third day we lay ten miles off the coast for the
-whole twenty-four hours. On the 9th we sighted an islet thirty miles
-from Thursday Island. This we passed safely, but at 1.30 a strong tide
-from the leeward set us to windward of the next island, where there is a
-bad reef, and at 4 P.M., when we were running before the wind at the
-rate of six knots an hour, we ran right on to it. As morning broke we
-found we were on a shelving reef, and in a very undesirable predicament
-indeed. We threw out stone ballast, and after bumping about for four
-hours, and making many unsuccessful attempts to get the boat off, losing
-an anchor and chain in the process, we managed to get clear with the
-flood tide. Next night we got into Thursday Island, and, on examining
-the ship, we found that some sheets of copper had been torn off her.
-
-At Thursday Island we were both prostrated by a sharp attack of fever.
-This was the first time it had seized me since I came to New Guinea, and
-it is not unusual when a man has been living in the wilds for some time,
-and has escaped malaria, that he falls a victim to it almost as soon as
-he returns to comparative civilisation and better food. In spite of this
-drawback, we were successful in getting our collections despatched, and
-at 8 P.M., on the 23rd of May, on a dark, dirty, and very gusty night,
-with a nasty sea running, we left Thursday Island, and steered our
-course for Hall Sound. In the vicinity of Bramble Cay—a dangerous
-sandbank, about 160 miles from Yule Island—we had our sails blown away,
-and were left in an almost helpless condition, only two small sails
-remaining. For the three following days we beat about in a heavy sea,
-not knowing exactly where we were, for we had not been able to take an
-observation since we left.
-
-On the evening of Friday the 29th May we managed to get under the
-shelter of Yule Island, inside the reef, and into smoother water. This
-was fortunate, for that night it blew a hurricane, and there was a heavy
-sea, even where we were lying. When daylight broke we went on, and
-anchored off the mission station at Yule Island, whence we sent word to
-Port Moresby by whaleboat that, owing to our disabled condition, it
-would be impossible for us to go there to clear, for the Customs
-regulations are that all vessels crossing to New Guinea must clear at
-Port Moresby, Samurai, or Daru. Of course, we could not beat up to Port
-Moresby against the S.E. monsoon without sails, so we lay there five
-days, until the whaleboat returned with our clearance. Our stay was
-anything but pleasant, for we had to remain on board the small ketch
-under a blazing sun, as we were unable to land until we got our
-clearance from the Customs.
-
-There was, however, one remarkable diversion during this weary time of
-waiting; for on our arrival we found, to our surprise, a large iron
-sailing-ship at anchor in the sound—certainly the largest vessel that
-ever entered it. She proved to be the _W. C. Watjen_, a German barque
-that had gone through a terrible experience in the very centre of the
-typhoon, the tail of which had given us so much trouble. I made friends
-with the captain—a hero in his way—who, without being aware of what an
-extraordinary feat of seamanship he had performed, told me in the
-quietest possible manner one of the most wonderful tales of the sea it
-has ever been my lot to hear. It was indeed, in many particulars, almost
-an exact parallel to Mr. Conrad’s remarkable story, “Typhoon.”
-
-[Illustration:
-
- 1.—LOW TIDE AT HANUABADA, SHOWING THE PILE-BUILT HOUSES.
-
- 2.—SIMILAR HOUSES FROM ANOTHER POINT OF VIEW.
-]
-
-The vessel was bound from New York for Yokohama with kerosene. She had
-been out from New York for 196 days without sighting a single ship, and
-when off the coast of New Caledonia she encountered the typhoon. The
-captain’s first warning that a tempest was brewing was, of course, a
-sudden and unaccountable fall of the glass. Suspecting what was in store
-for him, he went on deck and gave orders to prepare for a typhoon. In
-fifteen minutes he returned to his cabin, and found that in that short
-space of time the mercury had actually fallen seven-sixteenths more, and
-he knew from that indication that he would shortly have to face a storm,
-which he may well have doubted the powers of his vessel to weather.
-
-Before very long the tempest struck her in all its fury. For five days
-she encountered the direst perils. Her cargo had originally consisted of
-80,000 cases of kerosene, and during the worst of the tempest 20,000 had
-been thrown overboard. On the very first day the rudder was carried
-away, but by extraordinary efforts the crew contrived to rig a staging
-at the stern for steering, and they managed to fit up a primitive
-rudder. The captain was injured when the rudder was carried away, for
-the long tiller (the _W. C. Watjen_ was so old-fashioned that they did
-not use a wheel) swept round and hit the master heavily on the groin. A
-huge hole, six feet in diameter, had been knocked in the stern when the
-rudder was carried away, and this flooded the cabin and the middle part
-of the ship. They managed to stop the hole and bale out the cabin, but
-the tremendous seas denied the crew all access to the forward part of
-the vessel, where the store of fresh water was kept, and for five days
-they had nothing to drink but the dish-water which had been left in the
-cook’s galley. Strangely enough, there was only one very serious
-casualty, the second mate being disabled by an accident to his knee. The
-captain told me that during the worst of the storm they were continually
-under water; the seas seemed to strike them simultaneously at bow,
-stern, port, and starboard, and at times seemed to descend even from the
-heavens. How terrible the force of the tempest must have been was proved
-by the fact that the great steel masts of the vessel, six feet in
-circumference, had all gone over the side.
-
-Although thus disabled herself, however, the _W. C. Watjen_ was enabled
-to play good Samaritan to a smaller German vessel in a like plight, and
-took up her crew and brought them safely to Hall Sound. All the bulwarks
-were carried away, iron plates one-eighth of an inch thick were peeled
-from the sides of the ship, and crumpled up like paper by the force of
-the wind and sea. After the fifth day the captain was able to take an
-observation, and, by the help of an old chart, he concluded that New
-Guinea must be his nearest land. Crippled as he was, he endeavoured to
-make for Yule Island, where his chart, which was incomplete, told him
-there was a mission station, and, curiously enough, he was quite close
-to his desired haven when he was discovered and towed in by the
-_Moresby_ after seventy-six days’ stress. Had the vessel drifted farther
-west, she must have gone on the reefs, and the crew would certainly have
-fallen victims to the cannibal natives. It is really extraordinary how
-she managed to escape all the dangers of the coral islands that dot the
-seas for at least 200 miles west of Hall Sound.
-
-The same typhoon wrecked Townsville, unroofed an hotel, reduced brick
-buildings to débris and killed seven men; at the same time the sea
-receded and left the shipping dry.
-
-When we had been lying in Hall Sound some three or four days, the
-_Merrie England_ came up with the Administrator, Mr. Ruthven Le Hunte,
-who asked us to breakfast, and told us that for some days he had been
-very anxious about the _St. Andrew_ and had been keeping a sharp
-look-out for us on his passage from the west.
-
-When we had finally got our clearance we set about going to camp again
-at Ekeikei, but it took us until the 17th June to get together our
-carriers. The old difficulties in regard to them again beset us, but
-after great trouble and much searching and persuasion we obtained a
-somewhat inadequate force with which we pushed on and got back to
-Ekeikei on the 20th June. There five of our boys deserted.
-
-No sooner were we back in camp than a new trouble assailed us in the
-shape of an attack of sickness among our natives. We had hardly been a
-week at Ekeikei and were just settling down to our work, when one or two
-boys turned ill and complained of headache and were very feverish, and
-very soon the tell-tale rash proclaimed they had German measles. They
-were very miserable, poor fellows, and lay, some under the house, and
-some in the sun, all showing signs of considerable distress. Nursing,
-according to our ideas, was of course impossible, for you cannot induce
-a savage to keep himself covered up. A curious symptom in one case was
-that the boy’s speech was affected. We did our best for them and gave
-them cooling medicine, and fortunately they all recovered. As soon as
-they were convalescent they wanted to go back to their villages, and it
-was very difficult to dissuade them. That would of course have been a
-very disastrous proceeding, as they would certainly have returned only
-to spread the infection, which is most easily communicated during
-convalescence.
-
-Knowing that they had caught the disease on the coast, they were,
-naturally, very reluctant ever to undertake any other journeys for me to
-the sea again, and the situation was altogether very trying, for they
-said that the white man brought the sickness. While it lasted it was a
-very hard matter to hold the camp together. Finally, however, when they
-saw that the white man was doing everything in his power to help them,
-they were reassured. On their own account they tried to treat
-themselves, by the peculiar native method of bleeding, which will be
-found more particularly described in the chapter dealing specially with
-Papuan manners and customs.
-
-On June 22 we lost Sam for awhile, for we had to let him go down to Port
-Moresby to be treated for some trouble in his leg, but he promised to
-return in six weeks.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- A DESERTED VILLAGE.
-
- All the inhabitants of the village had fled at our approach except one
- old man.
-]
-
-At the beginning of July Harry set out on a rather adventurous journey,
-for I consented to allow him to go alone to the Kebea. It is scarcely
-likely that in the history of British New Guinea an English boy of
-sixteen has ever been alone with cannibals. His difficulties were not
-long in beginning, and I quote the following extracts from his diary:—
-
-
- “Left Ekeikei 5.30 A.M. After half-an-hour one man played out, so I
- had to take about 12 lbs. out of his bag and carry it myself; two
- hours from Madui he played right out; a woman carried his load. We
- travelled very slowly and stopped often. Did not get to Madui until 4
- P.M.; found the little bottle of brandy father gave me in case of
- need, broken and contents gone.
-
- “_July 2nd, ’03._—After changing carriers went on to Dinawa, and after
- resting a little, on to the Kebea, where we arrived at 5 P.M.
-
- “_July 7th._—I left for Yo-ya-ka, on the other side of the Kebea, as I
- wanted to get carriers to go to Ekeikei to bring up father and Sam.
- They were very frightened when I went into the village and would not
- come near me. The road was very steep and I got back very tired. It
- was a long walk. Could not get any carriers.
-
- “_July 8th._—There is a feast at Yo-ya-ka and I shall be very glad
- when it is over, as then I hope to get carriers. There is not much
- food here, only sweet potatoes. A difficult country to shoot or
- collect in.
-
- “_July 9th._—Hardly any food left. The natives of the village of
- Inomaka object to my collector shooting there, and refuse to permit
- him to collect butterflies, so the boy returned empty-handed. I am
- sending a few carriers to father, only three. I have been busy
- enclosing the end of the hut that Sam had previously hastily built up,
- as it was left open. One of my boys, Matu, left me yesterday and has
- not returned.
-
- “_July 13th._—Shall be glad of the shooters’ return, for I have had no
- meat for nine days, only sweet potatoes. Last night I tried the lamp
- for moths and did not do badly.
-
- “_July 14th._—Shooters return with nothing. Ow-bow arrived in the
- afternoon, but no carriers. Got 190 moths to-night and busy pinning
- them to-day.
-
- “_July 15th._—Father arrived at 4.30 P.M.”
-
-
- AMPLIFIED NOTE ON THE JOURNEY TO YO-YA-KA
-
-For my journey to Yo-ya-ka I started from a point opposite the Kebea and
-went down past one of the Yuni-Yuni villages, situated on a spur of the
-mountains. We then made a long ascent of some 2000 feet leading up to
-the same ridge as Mount Kebea where the village of Yo-ya-ka is situated.
-It was a most remarkable place, and it is difficult to convey exactly to
-those who have never seen it, the idea of what these Papuan ridges with
-their strangely perched villages are. They come up almost to a razor
-edge, relatively speaking, and certainly the free footway on that
-Yo-ya-ka ridge was no wider than fifteen inches. This narrow strip of
-foothold followed the main street of the village, and on each side of it
-the houses were on supporting poles. The extreme sharpness of the
-declivity on each side, of course, made the houses much higher on the
-side farthest from the road than on that facing it. As structures they
-were not much to boast of; there were about twenty of them and all were
-tumble-down. The Yo-ya-ka people were preparing for a feast, and when I
-arrived the men were strutting about in their feathers and paint.
-Various tribesmen from a distance had assembled; three were from
-Yuni-Yuni and some from Baw-boi. Among the visitors we noticed some
-familiar faces. A native helper named Gavashana recognised me at once.
-He asked me to come in, so I sat down and gave him some tobacco. The
-Baw-boi people, however, were greatly alarmed at my appearance. They
-began to cry and retreated, saying it was “Fi-fi,” that is, magic. Their
-acquaintances, however, reassured them and made them come up to me and
-shake hands. I then tried to induce a few men to enter our service as
-carriers, but failed, so I determined to return and started at once.
-When I had gone a little way up the ridge, Ow-bow, for some reason best
-known to himself, persuaded me to let off my gun, whereat the whole of
-the merry-makers turned out and began to jabber at the rate of nineteen
-to the dozen.
-
-I returned to the camp at Mount Kebea, and for the next week or so
-experienced rainy weather and great discomfort. All my provisions were
-gone, and I had to live on sweet potatoes and a few birds we could
-shoot. I tried eating the _Drepanornis Albertisii_, but it was the most
-shocking flesh I have ever eaten. We roasted the bird on a split stick
-and found it as bitter as gall; as was to be expected, I did not go
-further than the first mouthful, although I was very hungry.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XI
- _A BOY OF SIXTEEN ALONE WITH CANNIBALS_
-
-Further into the Mountains—A Murder—The Settlement of the Blood Price—A
-Pig for a Life—Harry’s Further Adventures alone among Cannibals—Various
-other Murders—The Village of Amana—A Tree-House—The Lunatic at Amana—
-Foula—A Pretty Village.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XI
- ALONE WITH CANNIBALS
-
-
-The next day or two are thus outlined in Harry’s diary:—
-
-
- “_July 17th, 1903._—Some natives arrived from Deva-Deva and two from a
- village close by called Coo-lu-coo-lu. These natives are going for us
- to Ekeikei to fetch up our things, but they ask for a gun as they are
- afraid of the Madui people—likely!
-
- “_July 21st._—Father down with fever.
-
- “_July 23rd._—Yesterday’s report that a man had been killed proved
- correct. Getting some fine moths, about 300 last night—good nights are
- rare. Sam returned to-day with the three boys he took with him; they
- are to have a few days’ holiday and then they will return to us. Warm,
- misty, dark nights such as we are having are best for moths.
-
- “_July 28th._—To-night the best night we have had as yet, 750
- specimens—94 of which were Sphingadae. On nights like this we do not
- go to bed at all. Getting short of boxes. We have to send to Ekeikei
- for material.”
-
-
- NOTE ON THE MURDER OF OW-BOW’S BROTHER
-
-One evening we heard a woman wailing down in the village and knew that
-something was wrong. Shortly afterwards the natives began calling, and
-we learned that some one had been killed. A messenger came up to tell us
-it was Ow-bow’s brother who had been murdered. The latter man was much
-disconcerted, and tried to persuade himself that it could not be so.
-Later on, however, the messenger came up with indisputable news, and we
-heard that the murder had been occasioned by a proceeding that was to
-some extent romantic.
-
-It seemed that Ow-bow’s brother had some time before stolen the
-murderer’s wife, and taken her away to his own village and kept her
-there. After a time it occurred to him that having got her he might as
-well pay for her, after the native manner, and accordingly he visited
-the husband in order to settle his account. The husband, however, was
-not disposed to receive compensation of this sort, and accordingly he
-killed and ate the other. There is no doubt that he had heard of the
-man’s intention to come and see him, and that he laid wait for him. The
-victim was either speared or clubbed.
-
-The wailing for the dead man lasted about four or five hours, which is
-about the limit of Papuan mourning. After that time a murder becomes
-merely an interesting subject of conversation, and the people gathered
-around the camp fires, eagerly conversing in low tones until far into
-the night. At first their disposition was to demand a life for a life,
-that they might slay and eat, although, curiously enough, they would not
-have committed cannibalism in the presence of a white man or a native
-woman!
-
-[Illustration:
-
- HARRY PRATT.
-]
-
-Next day our people and the villagers held a conference; they did not
-meet, however, but simply contented themselves with calling from ridge
-to ridge. Gradually the idea of the vendetta wore out of their minds,
-and at last it was proposed that the murderer, instead of paying a life
-for a life, should simply pay a pig for the murdered man.
-
-Accordingly two messengers brought in the compensation, slung on a pole.
-The pig was solemnly slain and eaten, and the incident was closed.
-
-The next extract from my son’s diary is more important, for if his
-journey close to the Kebea was risky, it was not nearly so sensational
-as one he had afterwards to make back to Ekeikei in order to relieve our
-higher camp from the pinch of hunger. His own account, however, scarcely
-gives a hint of the peril he was in.
-
-
- “_July 30th._—All the boys engaged to go to Ekeikei for the sago have
- run away, as they say that the natives at the village of Madui are
- hostile. Sam has gone out carrier hunting and obtained only two.
-
- “_July 31st._—I left this morning (as we are out of trade and
- provisions) at 6 o’clock for Ekeikei, arriving there at 4.30, but it
- was 2 A.M. before I could rest.
-
- “_Sat., Aug. 1st._—Left Ekeikei early about 7 A.M., and reached Madui
- about 4 o’clock. Had a bad night; it was very long, and I had no sleep
- at all. The mist very thick over the Madui hills. A good night for
- moths had it not been so light.”
-
- “_Aug. 2nd._—Reached the Kebea at 3 P.M.
-
- “_Aug. 3rd._—Very busy making sago boxes.
-
- “_Aug. 4th._—They killed another man at Madui the night I was there—
- they are killing a lot of men, women, and children.”
-
-
-The incident here outlined by my son may well bear a little further
-amplification. Trade and provisions had all but failed us, and I could
-not possibly go back myself to our base at Ekeikei without serious loss
-of time. It would have been out of the question, too, to take back the
-whole party. There were sufficient indications of the unrest among the
-natives at the time, and consequently it was nothing but the direst
-necessity that induced me to accept Harry’s offer to go down himself
-with a few carriers to bring up what we required. I had great confidence
-in the lad’s common sense, he knew the language, and he seemed to have
-the knack of dealing with the natives. After serious consideration of
-the risk, therefore, I agreed to let him go. At first it was not easy to
-get our carriers to undertake the journey, so evil was the reputation of
-the village of Madui through which the party must pass, but after
-persuasion we got the consent of a sufficient number, and not without
-serious misgivings, which I was careful to conceal, did I watch the
-little party set out. The matter, however, was urgent. Starvation,
-rebellion, and desertion of my followers threatened us had we been left
-absolutely destitute. On the way down Harry and his party got through
-Madui safely. They reached Ekeikei, procured what they wanted from our
-stores, and began the toilsome ascent once more. At Madui trouble
-awaited them. There had been a native fracas, a man had just been
-murdered, and the blood-lust was strong in the people, who, on Harry’s
-arrival, demanded that he should give up one of his boys to be killed
-and eaten. My son, though well armed, had the wisdom not to make any
-parade of force, and resorted to persuasion. After much argument, he
-persuaded the Madui people to forego their demand, but it is not
-surprising that during the night, in the course of which another murder
-was committed, he kept the strictest watch, allowing himself not a wink
-of sleep. One can well believe he found the vigil “long.” In the morning
-they got clear away with their loads, and the same evening I was,
-needless to say, relieved and delighted to welcome them back to my camp
-on the Kebea. No youth of my son’s age has ever, I am sure, undertaken
-so hazardous a journey among the New Guinea cannibals.
-
-
- “Preparations to leave the Kebea for Foula.
-
- “_Aug. 8th._—Left the Kebea at 9 A.M. Left eight loads behind me.
- Reached Coo-lu-coo-lu at 11 A.M. We ascended a hill 4000 feet high,
- then descended 2000 feet, very steep, then up again to Coo-lu-coo-lu.
- Many of the inhabitants are absent making sago.
-
- “_Aug. 11th._—Kept two days for our relays. Only by studying the daily
- routine of this journal can any one realise the difficulty of getting
- about in New Guinea.
-
- “Reached Babooni after three hours’ walk, and then descended 1000 feet
- to the river Aculama.
-
- “_Aug. 12th._—We arrived at Amana at 10 A.M. There is a tree-house
- here, 40 feet above the ground—used as a look-out station. A small
- village, and the people bad. About two months ago the chief murdered a
- man and a boy close to our yesterday’s camp. We heard of five other
- recent murders. There is a lunatic here, the first and only lunatic we
- saw in New Guinea. We sent an armed native to call Foula to our aid
- for carrying.”
-
-
- NOTES ON AMANA AND THE TREE-HOUSE
-
-Amana was a most peculiar village, and like Yo-ya-ka was built on an
-extremely narrow ridge, so narrow indeed that we could not pitch our
-fly-tent there, but slept in a house the front part of which overhung a
-precipice. The house commanded a most lovely view far away into the
-valley, the slopes of which were covered with dense wood. We could see
-the river flashing at intervals through the greenery; it must at least
-have been 1500 feet below us, but the roar of the torrent came up to us
-with great distinctness. As we approached Amana our carriers suddenly
-put down all their loads and would not enter. On being asked why, they
-said that some time before the chief of Amana had killed one of their
-people.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- OUR CAMP IN THE OWEN STANLEY RANGE 3,400 FEET ABOVE SEA LEVEL.
-
- The scenery in central New Guinea is magnificent.
-]
-
-We went in and made the acquaintance of this worthy. He was rather a
-personable character, quite bald, and with a very noble forehead, but,
-like most of the more degraded aborigines, he could not look the white
-man in the face. On hearing of our approach he became frightened and
-retreated to a tree-house, one of the most remarkable curiosities which
-we saw in New Guinea. In the village was a large tree, the trunk of
-which reached up about 20 feet bare of branches, and then the main stem
-divided into a fork. Among the branches were two platforms. To the first
-there was a very rude ascent, a rough ladder consisting of two uprights
-with rungs placed at an angle of at least 65 degrees. Above that was the
-second platform, forming the bottom of the house, which was reached by
-steps, very narrow, but not so far apart as the steps of the lower
-ladder. The tree-house is not uncommon in New Guinea, but it is very
-exceptional to find two platforms. The uprights and ladders were made of
-bamboo, and the rungs were made of boughs cut anyhow with walo, a
-species of cane which grows to a length of 20 feet, and is used for
-lashings. Each cane is the size of a thick pencil, and has a spiky outer
-cover. This is peeled off when the cane is ripe, and it is then split,
-an operation requiring great dexterity, and one which can only be
-performed by the Papuans themselves, for none but a native could split a
-20–foot cane cleanly down its entire length.
-
-The higher platform which supported the house measured about 12 feet by
-6 feet; it was made of bamboo cross-pieces, interlaced with bark. The
-roof was covered with grass, and the only aperture was one small door,
-over which the thatch came closely down. There was just room for a
-person to crawl in.
-
-We had considerable difficulty in inducing the chief to leave his
-retreat, but at length he summoned up sufficient courage to come out and
-speak to us.
-
-At Amana we noticed no conical houses, the dwellings being for the most
-part of the kind known as the “lean-to.”
-
-We noticed various other curiosities at Amana. One was a rather
-mysterious grave, just outside the village at the point where the
-carriers put down their loads. This place, which for some reason or
-other was regarded as sacred, was surrounded by a low stockade, but no
-attempt was made to keep the enclosure—which was quite overgrown—in
-order, and we learned nothing regarding its origin, for the Papuans are
-a people without a history.
-
-The people wore an ornament, which we also noticed among the Tugeri in
-Dutch New Guinea. This was the oval, highly-polished grey seed of a
-species of grass which grows at Amana. The villagers wore the seeds on
-strings or singly in their hair. The Tugeri string the seed into
-necklaces and wristlets. As the grass grows only at Amana, it is a
-certain proof of communication between the Tugeri and the hill tribes.
-
-
- THE LUNATIC AT AMANA
-
-In the village of Amana we met the only halfwitted Papuan we saw in New
-Guinea. He had been imbecile from his birth, and at the time we saw him
-his age was probably from 28 to 30, but it might have been less. He
-could not speak and was very deaf. He was of a very pale coffee colour,
-and might probably have stood about 5 feet 6 inches, but he was
-strangely bent and very thin. He communicated with his fellows by means
-of signs, and was regarded in the village as quite an amusing character.
-In fact, to the best of my belief, he was maintained by the villagers
-simply because of the amusement they got out of him. He had a mother
-alive who was quite sane, but he himself lived alone, and was very
-nervous about coming out to see the white man. The tribesmen, however,
-were determined to show him off, and after a great deal of persuasion he
-was brought up to me.
-
-They made signs to him to dance, and this was evidently a common
-pastime, for, without the least reluctance, he began his performance,
-which was unskilled enough and slightly repulsive. His dancing consisted
-of wobbling the head and feet at a tremendous rate and putting out his
-tongue. As soon as he began to show off, the Amana people sat down in
-front of him and enjoyed the spectacle. He took his mission of purveyor
-of diversion with deadly seriousness, and all the time he danced he made
-a strange mumbling noise. He was popular with the children also, and
-they would bring him out and set him dancing whenever they felt dull.
-For clothes he wore the usual native costume of the mountains, except
-the tight belt, which was perhaps too much an adjunct of dandyism for
-this unfortunate to affect. Not only would he dance at the word of
-command, but he would take off all his clothes to order, and carrying
-his meagre garments over his arm, he would run from one end of the
-village to the other clapping his hands in slow time. It was considered
-superexcellent fun to make him dance with his clothes off, and all the
-time the Philistines made game of the poor creature, who, however, was
-no Samson!
-
-Another primitive jest was to give him unpalatable and impossible things
-to eat, but they had the decency never to let him actually eat a gift of
-charcoal—a not uncommon present—although they allowed him to come within
-an ace of doing so. He was tremendously greedy, and when cooking or
-eating was going on he would try to grab all he could. As soon as we
-began to prepare a meal he lost all fear of us, and pursued his usual
-tactics. He would snatch at our plates like a dog, seize as much as he
-could, and long before one could say that curiously cumbrous phrase
-“Jack Robinson,” he would have it all stuffed into his mouth. If we told
-him to go away, he would remove himself for about five yards and sit
-down. In a very few minutes he had crawled up again and would make
-another raid upon our dishes.
-
-We had some most interesting conversations regarding the lunatic with
-Ow-bow, who told us what was to be known of his family history. Ow-bow
-said descriptively that he was “bad inside,” and added oracularly,
-“Olana lakuana,” which means, “Head no good.” We asked particularly if
-such a person would have been allowed to marry, whereupon Ow-bow gave an
-emphatic negative, saying, “Wabeeni daba kadena enai makana affi?” which
-is literally, “Woman what kind this fellow have?” (“What sort of woman
-would have this fellow?”) The poor unfortunate was, however, extremely
-harmless. One could do what one liked with him, for he was never known
-to lose his temper.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- 1.—LOOKING DOWN A NATIVE HANGING BRIDGE.
-
- 2.—A SIDE VIEW OF THE SAME BRIDGE.
-]
-
-
- “_Aug. 13th._—Several carriers came, and we started at 10 A.M. and
- arrived at Foula at 3 P.M. It is a fairly large village for this part.
- They speak quite a different language from that of the Kebea and
- Dinawa. We rigged up a temporary verandah for our work. To-day we got
- a few good butterflies, but few moths at night; too much light. The
- height of our camp here is 2600 feet. We bought a pig to-day, killed
- it, and found it quite a treat; the meat was very good, and it
- afforded us fat for cooking.”
-
-
- FOULA VILLAGE
-
-Just before the entrance to Foula village we noticed the evidences of a
-great land-slide, which had left the ridge of rock, along which our path
-lay, as clean as a piece of china. The path had thus been rendered
-perilous, but the natives had had the sense to put up a light bamboo
-rail on each side, and this was extremely fortunate, for there was
-hardly room for the foot, and a slip would have certainly meant
-disaster, for the descent was sheer on each side for several hundred
-feet.
-
-Foula is one of the sweetest villages imaginable. There are really two
-villages—the upper and the lower. The upper one contains about fifteen
-to twenty houses arranged in a circle, and the approach to it is through
-an avenue of beautiful crotons planted by the natives. To reach the
-lower village one had to descend for about ten minutes. This other
-hamlet, which is picturesquely situated close to a fine waterfall, is
-divided into two parts, a narrow ridge connecting the two. The houses in
-this village stand in a line, and are very substantially built. Past
-them runs what looks like a road of well-trodden red clay, which seemed
-as if it had been rolled, and the whole place had the appearance of
-being beautifully kept.
-
-The Foula people were of a Jewish type of feature. Their language
-differs considerably from the dialects we had heard.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XII
- _THE UNEXPLORED: AMONG PAPUAN PEAKS_
-
-Still Higher in the Owen Stanley Range—The Road to Mafulu—Beauties of
-the Forest—The Hill Step—Curious Habit of Walking acquired in Abrupt
-Ground—Cold at High Altitudes—A New Camp built—Alpine Signs in Insects
-and Flowers—Routine Work—Food runs low again—Native Thieves—Followers
-discontented—They fear the Hostile Mafulu People—Daily Threats of
-Desertion—Strict Watch—My Rule for Night Visitors—Compulsory Carrying of
-Torches and Disarming—Weirdly Picturesque Night Scenes—Further
-Privations—Bird of Paradise Soup—Ugh!—Decide to depart—Natives burn down
-Camp to ensure our going.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XII
- THE UNEXPLORED: AMONG PAPUAN PEAKS
-
-
-From the Kebea to Mafulu it was a five days’ journey along the most
-rugged, toilsome, and difficult path. At one point one has to traverse a
-ridge which turns in a half-circle, and at the very top it is scarcely
-more than 6 inches wide, sheer precipice running down on each side. The
-dangers of the road were, however, somewhat compensated for by the
-magnificent view which one could enjoy from that point, and a
-butterfly-collector had also something to reward him. As we rested
-there, after having passed the most dangerous part of the ridge, along
-which we had to crawl on our hands and knees, I saw some of the rarer
-_Papilios_ in fairly large numbers. Unfortunately, they were all rather
-worn specimens and of no value for the collecting box, and I was sorry
-that I was not there earlier, so as to have captured these butterflies
-when they had freshly emerged from the chrysalis. They measure about 3
-inches across from wing to wing, and are of a most brilliant pea-green,
-shot with a lovely mauve sheen on the under wings. The descent was very,
-very steep, especially the last portion of the road, where it descended
-abruptly to the creek. We had to hold on by roots and vegetation and to
-look most carefully after our footing, for a false step might have sent
-us down a precipice, falling sheer for 800 feet. But for the support of
-the growing things we could not have made the descent at all, and the
-marvel was how our carriers managed it with their heavy loads. They
-seemed, however, quite unconcerned, and took no notice of the dangers
-besetting them. They would never think of lightening or setting down
-their loads, but moved on in a zig-zag, catching hold of the creepers as
-they went, without effort. The bed of the creek, when we reached it, we
-found to be full of boulders. While my men took a bath, I examined the
-gravel in the river bed, for it looked tempting for the mineral
-prospector. By way of experiment, and to pass the time, I washed out a
-panful or so of gravel, and noticed a few colours in the sand that
-indicated the presence of gold. It is not improbable that the prospector
-who worked that creek would find considerable trace of mineral wealth.
-Here I saw the indigenous breadfruit, about the size of a cricket ball,
-and full of kernels smaller than a chestnut, only with a thinner rind
-and of a chocolate rather than a red-brown colour. The natives boil it,
-and we found it floury and very palatable, though slightly bitter. The
-Papuans are very fond of this fruit when they can get it.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- ONE OF OUR CAMPS IN THE OWEN STANLEY RANGE.
-
- Note the line of mist across the picture just below the summits.
-]
-
-We ascended, by way of one of the two villages known as Foula, for four
-hours, the climb being all the way through dense forest soaking with the
-humidity of the atmosphere. Even the hot sun seemed scarcely to affect
-the prevailing damp. The rocks which beset our path were covered with
-lovely-shaded begonias, ferns, and trailing creepers, intermingled in
-richest profusion of golden tints. In the early morning the forest is
-alive with bird-life. The trees are of strange magnificence,
-particularly the mountain Pandanus, with its aërial roots, which cover
-an immense space and all converge into one stem 60 feet above the
-ground, whence the trunk runs up perfectly straight. Around us
-everywhere were also tree ferns, some of them rising to 30 feet in
-height, and besides these there were the enormous _Lycopodiums_ with
-leaves 10 feet long. These luxuriant forms of vegetation were thickly
-clustered upon the trees, and some of the masses must have been of
-enormous weight. They displayed a glorious profusion of scarlet, which
-had taken full possession of its supporting tree, for far above the
-domed mass of this superb parasite one could see occasionally large
-clusters of brilliant blossom here and there. More humble, but still
-very beautiful, was a little fern, similar to our Parsley Fern, which
-was distinguished by an exquisite iridescent blue all over the upper
-side of the leaf, while on the under side those fronds that were in seed
-showed a most brilliant golden yellow. Parrots great and small flashed
-about us, and now and then we caught a glimpse of the white cockatoo
-with the yellow crest that is found all over New Guinea. As we passed
-among the feathered colony, all these birds set up a tremendous
-screeching. The cockatoo, as I had occasion to know at a later period,
-can, when wounded, bite most cruelly. Of animals we saw little, for the
-inhabitants of this region are mostly arboreal and nocturnal. There are
-several species of the smaller animals, including the tree kangaroo, of
-which I wished I could have secured some specimens. These are born very
-imperfect, and are placed in the pouch; when they are once there the
-mother squeezes the milk into their mouths.
-
-We found the village of Mafulu very small and the people extremely shy.
-One or two men were about, and the women were at work in their gardens.
-We sent on some of our men to discover the best possible camping-place,
-a work of considerable difficulty, for there are no plateaux in the Owen
-Stanley range, and the contour of the ground, as I have already
-indicated, is terribly abrupt. In fact, when one has travelled for some
-weeks in these regions, a peculiar habit of walking is acquired, which
-is somewhat equivalent to a sailor’s sea-legs. This acquisition the
-traveller does not find out until he returns to low, flat ground, when
-he suddenly realises that he is stumbling at every step, and some
-practice is required to recover the ordinary method of locomotion, and
-he has to break himself of the habit of lifting his knees almost to his
-nose. About an hour’s march from the village the men discovered a fairly
-level spot, and by the time we came up they had, with axes and knives,
-begun to cut a clearing of the undergrowth to enable us to pitch our
-camp. We set up our own fly-tent and the natives’ two tents and built a
-large fire, for it was very cold and the boys were beginning to feel the
-climate of that high elevation. Indeed, during our whole stay at Mafulu
-we felt the stress of the climate severely. That first night was very
-chilly, and it was necessary to serve out blankets to the natives in
-order to enable them to withstand the cold. They slung their hammocks on
-sticks or trees, sometimes one above the other, and close to these they
-built large fires and kept them going during the night. The sky at night
-was clear and starlit, but the morning brought clouds, and mists
-enveloped the forest, often accompanied by heavy rain that made the
-place most depressing. The view was entirely shut out; everything was
-dripping; our clothes were very soon saturated, and the whole situation
-was most uncomfortable.
-
-The humidity of that region was proved by the fact that the under side
-of the leaves of various plants was covered with moss.
-
-The day after our arrival we began the building of a proper camp. We
-felled trees, erected a stockade and also a platform some little
-distance above the ground; over this last we threw the fly-tent, making
-a floor to it of split bamboo. Inside the tent we arranged to have a
-fire in the native manner. We put down a wooden frame, inside which we
-laid earth closely patted down to form a hearth in the Papuan style.
-After building our abode we had to discover another spot where we could
-carry on our work at night. When this was found, a further task awaited
-us, for the forest came so close that we had to open up a space to
-enable our lamp to shine out and thus attract the moths. To do this we
-had to fell more trees, and the precipitous nature of the ground
-rendered our task all the harder, for once when we had allowed a large
-newly-felled trunk to slide, it got out of hand and careered three or
-four hundred yards down the precipice, taking other trees with it.
-Finally, however, we managed to open up a gap towards the camp, which
-left us an excellent clearing for scientific purposes. Here we built our
-collecting verandah, and thither we repaired every night, a little
-journey requiring some self-sacrifice, for as we went those dreadful
-leeches I have already described attacked our feet and legs
-unmercifully.
-
-We had to do a good deal of our work unassisted, for our natives were
-not willing to accompany us, as they feared the Mafulu people. We knew
-perfectly well there was some risk, and never went up to the verandah
-without taking our revolvers. As we worked there through the small
-hours, our position was brilliantly lighted up by our lamp, so that, had
-the Mafulu people wished to do so, they would have had every opportunity
-of taking a good aim at us. Fortunately, however, they did not realise
-that while our lamp made us very visible to them, it rendered them
-entirely invisible to us, and although we sometimes felt rather uneasy,
-we never received any unpleasant reminder in the shape of a hurtling
-spear. Had they known, however, how entirely we were at their mercy, we
-might not have escaped.
-
-As we pursued our collecting here, it was interesting to note the Alpine
-signs in insects and flowers. On the trees grew a very fragrant
-rhododendron. Moths were plentiful, but butterflies were not, for
-everything in this dense forest was struggling for light, and the
-butterflies had accordingly retired to the tops of the trees. Here I
-counted at least twelve different species of paradise birds.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- SOME UNKNOWN SPECIES DISCOVERED BY THE AUTHOR IN NEW GUINEA.
-
- 1.—A new Reptile—Lygosama Pratti. 2.—Another new Reptile—
- Toxicolamus Stanleyanus. 3.—A new fish of the Gobiid Genus
- _Rhiacichthys_.
-
- _By permission of the Zoological Society of London._
-]
-
-We had not been long at Mafulu when we were faced with another trouble.
-Our food supply began to run low. We found that the tinned provisions
-had been tampered with, and suspected native thieves; our suspicions one
-day being confirmed, when our dog Yule brought in from the forest two
-empty meat tins which had been broken open with the axe. This evidence
-was incontestable, for we ourselves always used the tin-opener. Of
-course, when we taxed our Papuans they were ignorant of the whole
-affair. This theft did not improve our larder; meat ran out, we had very
-little tea and no sugar, only a scanty supply of flour, and, worst of
-all, no salt. We were accordingly dependent upon sweet potatoes and
-yams, which we purchased from the Mafulu people, and occasionally a few
-bananas were obtainable. The boys soon began to grumble about the cold
-and lack of food, but the real reason of their discontent was, of
-course, fear of the Mafulu people. Every day deputations waited on Sam
-and myself and threatened to leave. It was evident that the discontent
-was stirred up by two ringleaders, so we found out who these were and
-talked to them very severely, telling them they might go; but two men
-would not dare to venture back to their own village through a hostile
-country, so, of course, our permission to leave was not taken. These
-troubles were very annoying, for we wanted to remain as long as we
-could, as we were getting admirable specimens, but about the fourteenth
-day of our stay matters had come to such a pass that we had to give the
-men a definite promise that we would leave in a week.
-
-With such a state of things constant vigilance became necessary, and we
-had to divide the nights into watches. Sam would take three hours and
-then I would take three hours, and some of the natives were always awake
-for fear of other natives. It was very lonely in camp, but we passed the
-time smoking and watching a few sweet potatoes baking in the embers. As
-our own fellows were disaffected, it was necessary also to keep them
-under constant observation. From the tent we could watch their quarters,
-and Sam made a bamboo bed in the men’s shelter. They, poor fellows, had
-rather a rough time of it, apart from their fears and discontent, for
-one night a tremendous deluge of rain swamped their quarters. Next day
-they went into the forest and cut a large quantity of bamboo leaves,
-with which they made a splendid rain-tight roof about 6 inches thick. As
-it would have been a pity to have left without doing our best to get
-specimens of the paradise bird, we sent all our shooting boys away and
-allowed them to take a tent with them. The long-tail paradise birds
-frequent the Pandanus trees when they are in seed, and when the shooters
-found a tree in that condition they would camp near it and lie in wait
-for the birds. While this little expedition was out, Sam, Harry, myself,
-and a boy remained alone in considerable anxiety, for while the guns
-were away none of us had any sleep.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- THE AUTHOR AND SOME NATIVE COLLECTORS.
-]
-
-I cannot say that we had any actual threats, but the country round about
-us was disturbed, and great numbers of the Kabadi people, who had been
-to trade with Mafulu, and were returning home, began to stream through
-our camp. They came through in strings, at intervals of an hour or
-longer. Some of them carried pigs that they had received from the Mafulu
-people after dances and entertainments. These companies consisted of
-men, women, and a very few children. Several of them were painted as for
-a festival, and they always passed through the camp as quickly as
-possible, taking no notice of us. The Mafulu people used to visit us a
-good deal with the ostensible purpose of trading, but they always took
-care to come armed with spears. This I did not like at all, so I
-directed them to lay down their arms before they entered, and if they
-came to visit me after dark, I said they must light torches and hail me
-from the edge of the clearing as they approached. This they did, but
-they seldom came at night after I had put this restriction on them. The
-few times, however, that they did come with their torches, the sight was
-weirdly picturesque as the lights came glinting through the trees, and
-then congregated at the edge of the clearing, the flickering glare
-throwing up the lithe, bronze figures of the warriors into fine relief
-as they stood there waiting for permission to enter the white man’s
-enclosure. They seemed to have a lot of intimate conversation with our
-people, although only one of our men knew their language. They were,
-however, content to do their talking through the interpreter.
-
-Before we left, our food had practically run out and we were feeling the
-pinch very badly. Both Harry and I were growing extremely thin, and we
-were always taking in reefs in our belts. As regards weight, however, we
-were in fine walking form. The nerves of my people got no better.
-Sometimes they would hear the Mafulu people calling, and then they would
-be on the _qui vive_, thinking something was about to happen; they were,
-in fact, like men living on a volcano. Before we left we were in such
-stress that we were compelled to try bird of paradise soup; it was truly
-abominable, and after the first spoonful we got no further.
-
-All our things were packed, and Harry and I were inside taking the
-fly-tent down, when suddenly we heard a terrible uproar among the
-carriers. I rushed out, but by the time I got into the open I found one
-of the native houses in flames, and in less than ten minutes the whole
-camp was ablaze. I immediately demanded of the boys what they meant by
-this act, but they seemed to look upon it as a great joke, much as
-youngsters at home would regard a bonfire. It is not improbable that
-their object was to compel me to go, for the previous day my shooters
-had brought in twelve paradise birds, at which I had shown great
-delight, and they probably thought that I should be tempted to prolong
-my stay. It is just possible that I might, for the last days were the
-richest we had had so far as the capturing of birds and specimens was
-concerned. When the camp was still roaring up in flames we departed with
-our few remaining followers, the main body having gone on already with
-the chief part of the loads. One thing that makes me sure that the
-firing of the camp was deliberate was that the outbreak occurred in two
-or three places simultaneously.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XIII
- _LAST JOURNEY TO THE COAST_
-
-A Dangerous Stream-Crossing—Babooni—Sunshine once more—Successful Work—
-Poor Fare—Messengers to Ekeikei—The Tree-Cabbage—Method of Cooking
-Tree-Cabbage—A Great Curiosity—Spiders’ Webs as Fishing-Nets—Dancing
-Festivals—Back to the Kebea—Our Bean Crop—A Papuan Parliament—We obtain
-Credit—A Wife-Beater—My only Act of Perfidy—The Journey to Ekeikei—Back
-to the Land of Plenty—Last Visit to Epa—Mavai unfriendly—He is talked
-over and supplies Carriers—Example better than Precept—The Coast again—
-An Accident—The Natives drink Sea-Water—Good-bye to the Mountaineers.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XIII
- LAST JOURNEY TO THE COAST
-
-
-From our camp at Mafulu a march of from five to six hours brought us to
-Foula. On our way we rested at a little village, one of those belonging
-to the Foula people, but situated on the opposite ridge. There I missed
-my prismatic compass, and was rather concerned, but I ordered a thorough
-search in the bags, and was glad to find it. At this village the natives
-were reluctant to move on, and I believe that they were aware we were
-about to have bad weather, for before we had gone much farther we were
-in the midst of a deluge. I accordingly paid off all the unwilling
-carriers and allowed them to return home, hoping to get more at Foula.
-There they told us that as the Delava River was swollen there was no
-crossing, so I went down to inspect it myself and found it in a most
-terrible state. The stream was full of tangled mangrove roots and
-treacherous with slimy ooze. It was a horrible and uninviting flood to
-enter, with its foul waters and its mosquitoes, and one knew that it was
-a veritable fever-trap. In we had to go, however, the natives making a
-terrible splashing. For the most part we were wading up to our hips in
-water, picking our way as best we could across the tangled mangrove
-roots, and occasionally slipping down between them to a depth of two
-feet, these slips threatening to take Harry out of his depth. For part
-of the way we had to swim.
-
-When we had crossed we took our way to Babooni, along a track which ran
-up a valley and then wound up steep precipices. There was no actual
-village there, but only a camp which had been built by Sam on the
-extreme edge of the ridge. The situation was grandly picturesque, for
-this ridge terminated in an abrupt precipice, falling several hundred
-feet, and having the appearance of a huge headland thrust out into the
-valley. On each side the cliff came to within a few feet of our
-collecting verandah, and looking down from it we could see the
-confluence of three silvery streams, winding through charming tropical
-vegetation. Babooni would have been an ideal spot for a picnic. There we
-spent three weeks and had wonderful success in our work.
-
-Except that we were in daylight and amid delightful scenery—a welcome
-change from the awful gloom of the forest at Mafulu—we were, as far as
-living went, no better off than we had been on the higher ground, and
-our staple food was still sweet potatoes; but it was something to have
-the sun again, and altogether we were conscious of a reviving feeling of
-exhilaration at Babooni. The _Drepanornis Albertisii_, one of the finest
-of the birds of paradise, abounded, and we secured a considerable number
-of specimens on the opposite hill. I also secured a fine series of the
-_Ornithoptera primus_, the bird-winged butterfly, which is distinguished
-by its beautiful green and velvet-black wings, with brilliant golden
-fore-wings, the under side of which is black. It is very partial to the
-flowers of the tree Spirea, among the foliage of which its black and
-gold wings can continually be seen twinkling. Its colour contrast,
-indeed, gives it a most remarkable appearance in flight.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- A SPIDER’S WEB AS A FISHING-NET: A STRANGE NEW GUINEA DEVICE.
-
- A very huge and strong spider’s web, common to New Guinea, is used by
- the natives as a fishing-net. They set up in the forest a bamboo,
- bent as in the picture, and leave it until the spiders have covered
- it with a web in the manner shown.
-]
-
-But scientific work cannot be done on sweet potatoes alone, so I sent
-Wei-Yah and five men to Ekeikei to replenish our larder. They took a
-week on the journey, and on their return reported that the Ekeikei camp
-was safe, but there had been thefts from the stores at the Kebea. The
-foolish fellows had come back without salt, and as five men cannot carry
-very much, we were only a little better off than we had been. We were
-also in dire want of “trade,” and there would be fairly long accounts to
-settle with our carriers for the rest of the journey, the Foula men
-having exhausted all our trade when we paid them off at Babooni. In our
-straits, however, nature provided us with at least one delicacy, and we
-shall always remember Babooni gratefully for its tree-cabbage. These
-edible leaves grow on a small tree like a sycamore, and the manner of
-cooking is as follows: Each leaf is plucked separately, and when a
-sufficient number has been got together they are tied up into neat
-packets, bound round in banana leaves and cane string. Then stones are
-collected and heated on a large wood fire, and on the top of the hot
-stones the bundles of cabbage are placed, and over them the natives lay
-more banana leaves to a depth of about two feet, and above all another
-layer of hot stones. In about one hour the cabbage is cooked, the outer
-wrapping is taken off, and the delicacy is served on a banana leaf or a
-dish. It is a perfect god-send to the half-starved traveller.
-
-From Babooni we returned to the Kebea, varying our route so as to
-include the village of Waley, which we entered during a heavy rainstorm.
-Waley is a pleasantly situated village, occupying the whole of one side
-of a hill, where a large clearing had been burnt out and planted with
-sugar-cane and bananas. The natives had also laid out extensive and
-well-planted gardens.
-
-One of the curiosities of Waley, and, indeed, one of the greatest
-curiosities that I noted during my stay in New Guinea, was the spiders’
-web fishing-net.
-
-In the forest at this point huge spiders’ webs, 6 feet in diameter,
-abounded. These are woven in a large mesh, varying from 1 inch square at
-the outside of the web to about ⅛th inch at the centre. The web was most
-substantial, and had great resisting power, a fact of which the natives
-were not slow to avail themselves, for they have pressed into the
-service of man this spider, which is about the size of a small
-hazel-nut, with hairy, dark-brown legs, spreading to about 2 inches.
-This diligent creature they have beguiled into weaving their
-fishing-nets. At the place where the webs are thickest they set up long
-bamboos, bent over into a loop at the end. In a very short time the
-spider weaves a web on this most convenient frame, and the Papuan has
-his fishing-net ready to his hand. He goes down to the stream and uses
-it with great dexterity to catch fish of about 1 lb. weight, neither the
-water nor the fish sufficing to break the mesh. The usual practice is to
-stand on a rock in a backwater where there is an eddy. There they watch
-for a fish, and then dexterously dip it up and throw it on to the bank.
-Several men would set up bamboos so as to have nets ready all together,
-and would then arrange little fishing parties. It seemed to me that the
-substance of the web resisted water as readily as a duck’s back.
-
-Waley was also a place for dancing. Thither the tribes came for great
-Terpsichorean festivals, and invitations used to be sent as far as Foula
-by special messengers to bid the Foula people to these entertainments.
-As we passed Babooni we had met these couriers on their way to tell the
-Foula people about a dance that was shortly to be held, and inviting
-them to come and bring all their fine feather-work—the Papuan
-dress-suit—and all their pretty women. These dances often last for a
-week, and the revellers feast during the day and at night dance by
-torch-light. During the time we were in camp the noise of dancing and
-singing never ceased, and the fat pigs were continually being killed.
-This indispensable adjunct of Papuan life is solemnly divided according
-to ceremonial custom, and certain parts are reserved for the leading
-degrees of the tribesmen. The guests receive the more honourable
-portions, and in this instance the chief from Foula would receive the
-most honoured part of all.
-
-The tribesmen come to the dance fully armed, bearing spears 10 feet
-long, which were often splendidly decorated with birds’ feathers; over
-the point would be slung a pod full of seeds, which rattled as the spear
-was brandished in the dance.
-
-When we left Waley we pursued a very winding path through steep valleys,
-zig-zaging up the face of precipices and along the tops of almost
-razor-like ridges.
-
-On our return to the Kebea we picked a very fine crop of beans of our
-own sowing. The Papuan bean is broader than ours, and is gathered at a
-rather later stage; it is largely cultivated in the native villages.
-Once at the Kebea we had seriously to face the problem of getting down
-to the coast. Here we were with all our collections on our hands, as
-well as our stores and “trade” to meet the charges of our carriers none
-too plentiful. Obviously, the right plan would be to get the natives to
-engage to carry for us right down to Pokama on Hall Sound, for if we
-should be faced with the necessity of paying off a gang at Ekeikei, we
-should be cleaned right out of the equivalent of ready cash. I opened
-negotiations tentatively, and allowed the idea to get wind among my
-followers; then the thing began to be mooted in camp conversations, and
-the men would go off to discuss it with their womenkind. At first they
-were in great doubt, saying that it was very far, they did not know the
-country beyond such a place, and they would be very frightened in
-strange districts, especially on their return. At our invitation they
-gathered for a great conference, and I may be said to have summoned a
-Papuan Parliament, which immediately went into committee to discuss ways
-and means. I sent out Ow-bow, and several reliable fellows whom we knew
-to be willing to go all the way with us, to induce the others to come to
-the congress, and when we got them together we told them that if they
-would go to Hall Sound with us, we would make each man a certain
-payment, enumerating the different articles we were prepared to pay on
-our arrival at Pokama. We added that if any one preferred that his wages
-should include a preponderance of tobacco, or beads, or calico, over
-other articles, we should be quite agreeable.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- FISHING WITH THE SPIDER’S-WEB NET.
-
- The natives are here using the curious net prepared in the manner
- shown in another picture.
-]
-
-They gathered round our little house, some in and some out, and smoked
-the everlasting bau-bau, keeping up the while a quiet conversation. The
-women with husbands made difficulties, as was to be expected. They would
-say to any man who showed a disposition to join the expedition: “But we
-want you to help us in our gardens.” One of the wives proved especially
-a thorn in our side. She was the worst woman we met in Papua, the
-possessor of a terrible tongue, and she was always setting the men
-against going anywhere. The other women disliked her heartily, and there
-were always rows when she came into camp. Not once, but twenty times,
-were we annoyed by these disturbances, for Gouba, her husband, believed
-in attempting to tame his shrew, although, alas! he never succeeded. His
-methods were simple and drastic. He would pick up a billet of wood, when
-she was half-way through a tremendous scolding, and fetch her a terrific
-blow over the back. Thereupon ensued Pandemonium; the other men and
-women would gather round jabbering, but they made no attempt to stop the
-beating once it had begun. The unfortunate man had another wife, and the
-scolding one was not always with him, but when she was there was
-trouble. Gouba was willing enough to stay with us, poor fellow, but Mrs.
-Gouba was always on the _qui vive_ for some village dance or other. Her
-social engagements invariably clashed with Gouba’s industrial projects,
-and between them they made the camp very hot. To see her running with
-Gouba after her was a memorable sight. Of course, no Englishman likes to
-see a woman knocked about, but from what Ow-bow used to tell us, I am
-persuaded that Gouba was a sorely-tried man, and I should not be
-surprised to hear that by this time he has arranged a divorce on Henry
-the Eighth’s plan, and that Mrs. Gouba is now no more.
-
-But to return to our Parliament. I finally carried my point and engaged
-the carriers, but, alas! it was only by committing the only act of
-perfidy which I can lay to my conscience in all my dealings with
-natives. I found that if we were to get out of the country safely I must
-offer some further inducement, other than the ordinary articles of
-trade, and accordingly, although I had no intention of contravening the
-Government regulations so far, I said that a gun would be included in
-the wages of those who went down to Pokama. When the time came for this
-promise to be made good, I simply explained that the Government would
-not permit me to give them the gun. They acquiesced quite cheerfully,
-and consented to receive compensation in other articles. That there was
-no discontent or resentment, I am persuaded, and I had ample proof of
-this in my final parting from my followers, which I shall relate in its
-proper place.
-
-We now returned to Ekeikei, and on arrival there passed from the land of
-starvation to the land of abundance; hunting was once more possible, and
-early on the morning after our arrival we sent out our shooters, who
-came in loaded with cassowary, Gaura pigeon, wallaby, pig, and other
-spoils. The natives were in clover once again, and had a glorious time
-building fires, dressing the game, and preparing the food, for your
-Papuan’s greatest pleasure is to eat as much as he can, and in the
-shortest possible time, to sing, and then to sleep. Meals of Homeric
-generosity were devoured, and thereafter our people sat round their camp
-fires singing the beautiful mountain melodies of which I have already
-spoken. The prettiest and most soothing of all their tunes was the
-following, which has often with its gentle cadence lulled me to sleep in
-the wilds:—
-
-[Illustration: Chi-li-pa-la lu-a chi-li-pa-la lu-a lay: Chi-li-pa-la
-lu-a.]
-
-At Ekeikei we had, of course, to take up many additional loads of
-baggage, and the resources of our staff, already severely tried,
-threatened to prove entirely inadequate. Further recruits were not
-forthcoming, so all the baggage had to be re-distributed and the bags
-repacked. Even when this was done, and an additional weight apportioned
-to each man, we found that ten carriers more would be wanted, but as
-these were not obtainable I decided to leave Wei-Yah with the remaining
-baggage until I could get down to Epa, where I trusted that my old
-friend Mavai would send it in relays for me to Oo-fa-fa.
-
-At Epa things looked rather hopeless, for not only did five of my
-carriers bolt, leaving me saddled with their loads, but Mavai proved a
-broken reed. My ancient ally was no longer a white man, and for some
-unexplained reason had turned very uncivil. When I asked for carriers he
-said he had “no people,” but his village seemed as populous as ever, and
-the same numbers streamed in from the yam patch in the evening. I had a
-big talk with him over night, but could make no terms with him. Next
-morning Harry and I again had a long quiet talk with his Highness, and
-at last he relented so far that he ascended his platform, but did not
-don the persuasive red coat. He waxed fairly eloquent, gesticulated
-wildly, and at last, about 7 P.M., things took a better turn, and the
-first carriers consented to engage with us. Then the right honourable
-gentleman resumed his seat, having spoken just over half-an-hour. Next
-day they sulkily picked up their loads and set out. Mavai himself,
-believing that example was better than precept, marched with the first
-detachment. He himself shouldered a load. Thus we got everything away
-with the exception of two loads, the carriers in charge of which sat
-sullenly in their house. Finally, Harry and I had to go over and make
-these two fellows pick up their burdens, and thus we took leave of Epa.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- A WEIRD TRIBAL DANCE.
-
- The central figure wears a huge head-dress of bird of Paradise plumes
- surmounted by a gigantic aigrette of parrots’ feathers (to be seen
- in the background). The rank and file wear grass-fibre head-dresses.
-]
-
-The journey to Oo-fa-fa was accomplished in very sultry, trying weather,
-through a country that afforded little shade. The ground was stony,
-broken here and there with patches of wild oats and groups of eucalyptus
-trees, which ran up to a height of about 30 feet, and were conspicuous
-by their silvery bark, which was constantly peeling off like tissue
-paper.
-
-Having once undertaken the job, Mavai was as good as his word, and took
-us down to Oo-fa-fa, where we got boats. There I had a nasty accident.
-We put up for the night in a hut belonging to Mr. Jack Exton, the
-sandalwood trader, a very industrious and indefatigable man, who has
-made good roads to haul his timber down to the coast, and is very
-popular with the natives. “Jack,” as we called him, entertained us very
-kindly at his camp when we first went to Epa, and gave us every
-assistance in his power. During the first night at Oo-fa-fa I was
-sitting on a native hammock in the hut, when suddenly the cords gave way
-and I fell backwards upon a sharp stump and hurt my back severely. My
-leather belt saved me from any very serious injury, and there was
-fortunately no penetration, but the pain was intense for three or four
-days. I fomented the bruises with hot water at Oo-fa-fa, and managed to
-get down to the canoe next day, but I had to lie still during the rest
-of the voyage. At Pokama I was greatly relieved by the application of
-Elliman’s Embrocation, but I had difficulty in walking and was not free
-from pain for ten days.
-
-At the Sound some of the native carriers, those paying their first visit
-to the coast, drank great quantities of salt water without evil
-consequences.
-
-The canoe voyage was rather uneventful. Our flotilla was not numerous
-enough; the canoes we had were overladen, and, accordingly, we sent some
-baggage overland to Pokama. At that point the Rev. Mr. Dauncey received
-us with great hospitality, and with him we stayed while we were paying
-off our natives. To Ow-bow I entrusted the wages of the five rascals who
-had run away from us at Epa, and I have no doubt he paid it over
-scrupulously.
-
-After our business was concluded, the mountain people went away with
-very happy faces, and bade us good-bye, cordially hoping that they would
-see us again, and saying that on my return, if I sent for them, they
-would come down to the coast and carry me up-country. Some of them even
-wept as they took leave, and I must confess that I was genuinely sorry
-to part from my warm-hearted, good-natured followers, who had up to the
-last served me faithfully, in spite of occasional fits of
-refractoriness, which, after all, were easy enough to understand. It
-said a good deal for them that they followed the unknown white man as
-cheerfully as they did.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XIV
- _A FORTY-MILE TRAMP BY THE SHORE_
-
-A Comfortless Voyage—A Forty-Mile Tramp along the Coast—Wonders of the
-Beach—Armies of Soldier-Crabs—A Crocodile River—A Dangerous Canoe
-Voyage—At Port Moresby—A Pathetic Incident—Last Days of our Stay in New
-Guinea.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XIV
- A FORTY-MILE TRAMP BY THE SHORE
-
-
-At Pokama we got on board a vessel very heavily laden with sandalwood. I
-did not notice how perilously deep she was in the water until after we
-had put to sea. This promised a voyage of great discomfort, and Harry
-shortly became very sick. Partly on this account, and partly because we
-wanted to see a certain part of the coast more minutely, we went ashore
-in a small boat, and slept that night at the house of a coloured teacher
-in the service of the London Missionary Society. Next morning we set out
-on foot for Manu-Manu, forty miles distant, a long and very toilsome
-tramp, often rendered doubly difficult by the uncertain sands of the
-beach. Where the tide had left it wet we found it as firm to walk upon
-as a bicycle track, but in the dry sand we often sunk to our knees.
-Harry, especially, suffered severely, and his ankles were sore for a
-long time after. The heat also was terrific, and added greatly to our
-discomfort; but the walk was not without its interest and its diversion,
-although in point of scenery it was rather monotonous. Very conspicuous
-on the fringe of the coast vegetation was the true species of the shore
-Pandanus. Inland was dense forest, diversified with patches of grass and
-marshland. Our itinerary was as follows: Our first stage was twenty-two
-miles from Giabada to Issu, the way being greatly lengthened by the need
-to follow the bend of ever-recurring bays, where the treacherous sand
-and the lack of shelter from the sun proved particularly trying. But at
-this part of the march we saw one of the most extraordinary sights of
-all our travels—many thousands of soldier-crabs traversing the sandy
-beach in detached, regularly ordered bodies that moved evidently by the
-signal of some common commander. These “armed battalions” stretched for
-miles, and no matter what figure they assumed—whether wedge, triangle,
-or rhombus—the dressing, so to speak, of the outer ranks was perfect,
-and would have put many a Volunteer corps to shame. Not a crab was out
-of line. The advance was fairly rapid, and was always towards the sea,
-for a distance of, say, two hundred yards. When the crabs come out of
-their holes in the sand they throw themselves into this compact
-formation probably for safety. There was no walking along the beach for
-them—scarcely a clear hundred yards for miles. When approached, they
-quickened their pace perceptibly.
-
-The individual crab is small and has no shell. The spread of the legs
-would probably be 1½ inches, and the body is of a dark fawn colour,
-exactly resembling the wet sand of the beach, so that the creature’s hue
-is without doubt yet another of Nature’s adaptations for protection. It
-is remarkable also that it imitates only the wet sand, for the dry sand
-is of a dazzling silky whiteness.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- A SEA-COAST SCENE IN NEW GUINEA.
-
- Some of the houses of Elevada, one of the pottery towns, may be seen
- by the sea.
-]
-
-At Issu we stayed for the night, and did our best to sleep, although the
-sand-flies were a great torment. From Issu we went on to Manu-Manu, a
-stretch of eighteen miles, and as we went we saw many sharks, who
-followed us close inshore and kept pace with us for a considerable
-distance, hoping in vain that we would be unwise enough to bathe. Some
-natives, who had followed us from Giabada, tried to kill them by
-throwing sticks.
-
-Manu-Manu was our last halt before taking a canoe for Port Moresby. At
-the former place we found some men to assist us, and after spending the
-night there, and the best part of the following day in preparation, we
-embarked. At the mouth of the Manu-Manu River the crocodiles swarmed in
-the brackish water. This is the point where there occurred the fight
-between the natives and the crocodiles which I described in one of my
-earlier chapters. The canoe voyage that we made at this time was one
-that was only possible in fine weather, for there were many nasty
-headlands to round. The bays were very deep, and at the middle of the
-crossing from point to point we would often be ten miles off the land.
-Often, too, there were treacherous reefs to avoid, but fortunately we
-had moonlight after 2 A.M.; and so, sometimes sailing and sometimes
-paddling, we passed the villages of Boira and Borepada and reached Port
-Moresby at five on the evening of the day after we had left Manu-Manu.
-We arrived at the Government station just about the same time as the
-ketch which was bearing the bulk of our baggage.
-
-We entered Port Moresby by the western entrance, which is not deep
-enough for large ships, and can only be made by canoes. At Port Moresby
-we had intended to put up as formerly at Sam’s house, but we found news
-of deep affliction awaiting our faithful head-man. His wife Heli was in
-terrible distress, for she had lost two children while her husband was
-with us in the interior. Both were boys, one of seventeen known as
-George, and the other a bright little fellow of ten called Foralis, who
-had been a great favourite of ours on our former visit, and who used to
-make himself very useful to us.
-
-Poor George’s death was a merciful release, for although he was so well
-on in his teens, he was a mere dwarf, and had been ill since his birth—a
-sufferer from the so-called New Guinea disease, that incurable and
-mysterious disorder which eats away the legs. It is believed to be a
-form of leprosy. He was a fleshless, melancholy little being, who lay in
-bed all day, hardly ever moving. He had, however, all his senses, and it
-was pathetic to see him pursuing his only amusement, playing with the
-petals of flowers and with different coloured papers, of which he
-sometimes made strings. Sam must have missed Foralis very keenly, for
-the youngster was at a most attractive age, and was beginning to be very
-useful in various ways. He had become quite a bold little horseman, and
-would often ride on errands for his father.
-
-We spent five days at Port Moresby in the usual routine of packing for
-the homeward voyage, the first stage of which we performed on the small
-steamer _Parua_, which took us to Cooktown, where we were interested to
-note the relics of former mining activity, for the place enjoyed a brief
-spell of prosperity, during which pretentious banks and public buildings
-sprang up, and still stand there as if in mockery of its absolute
-deadness. The time was when they took fifty tons of gold from the Palmer
-River, but those days had long gone by, although there is certainly
-plenty of mineral wealth in the hinterland that is entirely unworked,
-and excellent for tin miners especially. No effort has been made to work
-this, and it is difficult to get money for even a gold mine at the back
-of Cooktown, so much British capital has been lost there in wild-cat
-schemes. A once busy railway still runs fitfully to the Palmer River.
-
-We stayed three weeks at Cooktown, and during the second week we
-witnessed a thunderstorm that transcended in violence the worst I had
-ever seen in South America, and that is saying a good deal. After an
-intensely oppressive morning, a black cloud came up from the westward,
-and the storm burst with startling suddenness. In less than half-an-hour
-every street was a veritable river, and the lightning, continuous and
-seemingly ubiquitous, was accompanied by cracking and rending thunder
-that could only be described as appalling. Fortunately, no one was
-killed, and the only damage was to the roof of Burns’s store, which was
-struck by lightning.
-
-Save for the thunderstorm, our stay at Cooktown was utterly uneventful,
-and at the end of the third week we went down to Sydney and came home by
-the White Star line.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XV
- _NATIVE MANNERS AND CUSTOMS_
-
-The Papuan at Home—His Good Points—Physical Characteristics—Ceremonial
-Dress—Coast and Hill Tribes—Differences—Local Distribution of the Rami
-or Petticoat—Its Decrease in Length in the Mountains—Its Disappearance
-at Epa—Dandyism—The Priceless Chimani—The Shell Armlet—Household
-Constitution—Rudimentary Government—Courtship and Marriage—The Price of
-a Wife—Position of Women—Six Ways of Carrying an Infant—Meal Times—
-Weapons—Clubs—Their Manufacture the Monopoly of One Tribe—Weird Tribal
-Dances.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XV
- PAPUAN MANNERS, CUSTOMS, AND SUPERSTITIONS
-
-
-My object in visiting New Guinea, as the reader already knows very well,
-was not to prosecute the proper study of mankind, according to Mr.
-Alexander Pope, but it was impossible to live daily with those unspoilt
-children of nature without observing a good deal that was curious and
-noteworthy. I cannot pretend to be a trained ethnologist, and
-accordingly the notes that I have set down in this chapter on manners
-and customs make no pretension to any scientific co-ordination. I shall
-not therefore venture to draw conclusions, nor advance any theories such
-as would fall within the province of the professed anthropologist. My
-notes, too, were fragmentary, and often, owing to the stress of our
-journeyings and the pressure of the work which it was incumbent on me to
-prosecute, I had perforce to leave unrecorded at the time many things
-that might be useful to the student of primitive peoples. Such
-observations, however, as I am able to make, however incomplete, may
-safely be regarded as at first hand, and it is probable that in the
-majority of cases they were taken under exceptionally favourable
-conditions for observing the people just as they are. During our
-journeyings in the interior we depended on native help alone, and the
-people whom we employed were not, one might say, scared out of their
-usual way of life by the presence of a large body of white men. I and my
-son went absolutely alone into the wilds with no white lieutenant. We
-cast ourselves, as it were, on the hospitality of the aboriginal Papuan
-(and cannibal at that), but as the reader has seen, we had no reason to
-regret our draft on the bank of savage fidelity.
-
-In my second chapter I described the warlike Tugeri of Dutch New Guinea,
-a tribe whose ferocity has been such a thorn in the side of British and
-Netherland officials alike. I certainly should not have cared to trust
-myself with the Tugeri, but with the gentler people of the south-east
-portion of the island there was comparatively no great risk. My first
-close acquaintance with the Papuans was with the Motuan tribe, who lived
-around Port Moresby, and my earliest acquaintances were made among the
-potters of Hanuabada. The Motuans are fairly numerous, numbering, it is
-said, about 1400 in the Port Moresby district; they may be taken as the
-type of coast natives in this quarter, and roughly, for the purposes of
-this account, I may distinguish between “coast-men” and “hill-men,”
-taking the former to extend as far up as Epa. The Motuan men are
-well-grown, standing about 5 feet 10 inches on an average, the height of
-the women being from about 5 feet 6 inches to 5 feet 8 inches. Their
-features are very varied, and do not incline to any single type. The
-colour is of a rich bronze, and they are well and sturdily made. Most of
-them have mop-like hair very much frizzed, and some wear it tied up,
-while others have it short and curly, looking almost as if it had been
-cropped and lying close to the scalp. What we may call the “cropped”
-hair required little dressing, but to keep the mop hair in order they
-use a comb like a wide fork with five prongs and a fairly longish
-handle. With this implement they comb out their hair elaborately.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- HANUABADA WOMEN WEARING THE RAMI, OR PETTICOAT MADE OF LEAVES.
-]
-
-For ceremonial dances, and on festal occasions, they wear a wonderful
-head-dress made of cockatoo feathers, which looks, when it is assumed,
-like an enormous flat horseshoe, passing over the top of the head and
-slightly in front of the ears. It conceals the ears entirely when the
-observer looks the wearer full in the face.
-
-The most cherished ornament, however, is the necklace of dogs’ teeth,
-which is prized by the Papuans beyond any article of “trade” that the
-traveller can give them. Not even a knife or an axe is so welcome, nor
-can the traveller get so much work out of the Papuan for any steel
-implement as he can for one or two teeth. I knew of a case where a
-missionary, not with any fraudulent intention, but merely from a desire
-to test Papuan intelligence, manufactured imitation dogs’ teeth very
-cunningly out of bone, and offered them to a native. The man, however,
-had too keen an eye to be done; he weighed the teeth critically in his
-hand for a moment, and then handed them back with a scornful “No good.”
-
-A further adjunct of their very simple costume is the armlet, which is
-knitted from grass fibre with a pointed cassowary bone. This primitive
-needle has a hole running up its entire length through which the grass
-fibre is threaded, and then the ornament is woven either in a diagonal
-pattern or in straight horizontal stripes, with strands of various
-colours. They often actually knit it round the arm or the wrist quite
-tightly, and when this is done the ornament is permanent, and is never
-removed until it is worn out. Sometimes they wear a bunch of flowers
-stuck into the armlet, and these not particularly fragrant, but the
-Papuans are persuaded that it is quite otherwise, and, pointing to their
-bouquet, they say with delightful naïveté, “Midina Namu”—“Good smell.”
-Alas! it is really the reverse, and the wearers of flowers in this
-manner are by no means pleasant neighbours.
-
-They also wear anklets of feathers and strings of beads, and in some of
-their dances I have seen them decorated with huge bunches of grass,
-which hang from between the shoulders and sweep the ground. Some also
-affect a light band at the knee, and light cane anklets which rattle as
-they dance.
-
-Indispensable to the men is the little bag which carries their few
-personal possessions: their betel-nut, their lime gourd and knife, the
-invariable adjunct of the delightful vice of chewing betel—as every
-traveller in the Malay Archipelago knows—and the “Paw-paw,” a fruit with
-which a little European tobacco is often eaten. The coast women carry a
-much larger bag of knitted fibre, which may be best described by saying
-that it resembles a hammock with the ends tied together; in this they
-carry potatoes and wood, and sometimes it is borne upon the head, the
-centre of it being brought over so that it is supported by the forehead,
-while the tapering ends hang down over the shoulders. At other times it
-is carried round the neck.
-
-The chief costume of the women of the coast tribes is the extraordinary
-petticoat made of grass or of a wide-bladed weed, each leaf of which
-would be about 3 inches wide. The blades composing this garment fall
-down perpendicularly from a waistband, to which layer after layer is
-attached, until the “Rami” has that fine spread which used to be
-attained by more civilised women by a contrivance which I believe was
-called a “dress-improver.” As we went inland and rose gradually higher
-and higher in the mountains, we observed that the “Rami” was growing
-shorter and shorter, until at length, just after we had passed Epa, it
-disappeared altogether; and one may reasonably consider the absence or
-presence of this garment as the great symbol of division between the
-coast natives and those of the highlands proper.
-
-Among the men, both highland and lowland, the great symbol of dandyism
-is the “Chimani,” or nose ornament. This is made from a section of a
-shell about ⅜ of an inch thick in the middle, and tapering most
-beautifully towards the ends. It is accurately made, perfectly round and
-polished, and a good example would be about a span long. A fine
-“Chimani” very often has two black rings painted round it, about 1 inch
-distant from the end. These things are manufactured by the coast people,
-and they drift by exchange through the whole country. Very few young
-blades can afford to possess one, and accordingly it may be lent, either
-for a consideration or as a very special favour. The possessor of one of
-these ornaments could easily buy a wife for it, and sometimes it is paid
-as a tribal tribute by one who may have to pay blood-money, or is unable
-to give the statutory pig as atonement for a murder.
-
-Another shell ornament is the armlet, made from the lower part of one
-species of a conical shell; a section of this adornment would present
-the figure of a pointed oval, and, according to the part of the shell
-from which the armlet has been cut, its ends either meet or overlap
-without touching. To it they sometimes attach European beads or little
-fragments of tin. Its manufacture entails a great deal of work and a
-long continued grinding on stone or other hard substance. Sam had a very
-fine one which he presented to a man in order that that man might buy a
-wife, and my head-man’s generosity will be understood when I mention
-that one of these armlets fetches £5 at Port Moresby. A very affluent
-person will wear one on each arm, or two on one arm, as I sometimes
-observed was the case among the coast natives. This occurred chiefly at
-Hula.
-
-As regards households and tribal government, the Papuan customs are
-simple in the extreme; there is no augmentation of households on the
-patriarchal system of the sons bringing the wives under the parental
-roof. Each household consists of the father, mother, and children. The
-sons when they marry set up a separate establishment, and when all have
-married the grandparents usually remain alone.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- BUYING A WIFE: A NEW GUINEA WOOING.
-
- The suitor is depicted making an offer for the girl seated in the
- hammock beside her father.
-]
-
-The men marry after they are eighteen and the girls much younger, for
-they are considered ready for double-blessedness at fourteen. In the
-case of the men, there are exceptions to this rule, for we met an
-experienced young gentleman of fourteen, Kaukwai, who confided to us,
-with an air of deep wisdom, that he had already had two wives and had
-dismissed them both.
-
-In the villages there was no clearly defined form of government. There
-was, of course, invariably a chief, but his authority was not great, and
-nowhere did I see an autocrat, except Mavai, with whom the reader is
-already well acquainted. There is no regular council of elders, but in
-isolated instances the younger men may go to the elder for advice. The
-villagers, however, are wonderfully conservative in their institutions,
-and marriage between distant villages is uncommon. The man who dares to
-bring a wife from a distance gains great credit for an enterprising
-person. At Amana, for instance, we found an interpreter who had married
-a Foula woman, and this person was accounted strong-minded. He had
-either learnt the Foula dialect from his wife or had acquired it while
-he was staying at Foula courting her.
-
-The method of wooing is, as with all primitive peoples, more commercial
-than romantic. The intending suitor generally comes to the point during
-a tribal dance which has been arranged by calling from hill to hill. If
-the woman agrees to the match, the wooer does not think it at all
-necessary to make overtures to her father, but should negotiations be
-required he is neither laggard nor bashful. He puts the price in his bag
-and approaches the house of the sire, entering boldly and sitting down
-unbidden. Not infrequently the girl also comes in and sits probably in a
-hammock, listening to the debate on which her destiny hangs. The suitor
-at once names his price; if the old man thinks this is a promising
-bargain, he shows himself quite willing to discuss matters. If there is
-tobacco, the suitor takes up his host’s “Bau-bau,” draws a few whiffs,
-passes it to the father, scratches his head violently with both hands,
-and proceeds to haggle. Should the father think the match a good thing,
-he seldom withholds his consent long, but if he considers the young man
-is under-bidding, he holds out stiffly till the youth has raised the
-price sufficiently. As soon as the father consents, the bride is taken
-away at once and without any fuss. There is no ceremony and no wedding
-feast.
-
-The women are the agricultural labourers of Papua. Early in the morning
-they go out to till the gardens and the yam- or taro-patch; they are the
-hewers of wood and the drawers of water. Every night at Hanuabada we
-used to watch the long files of them wading across the shallow channels
-to the villages, carrying the great bundles of wood they had collected.
-Their families are not large, seldom more than two or three children,
-and though they treat them quite kindly, there is no demonstrative
-affection. At seven years old the children are expected to assist in
-domestic affairs, and begin to take their little part of carrying water
-and firewood to the village. Their faggots are tied up with wild cane
-string and are carried home on the women’s backs.
-
-When the women go out to the garden, or when they aid in heavy transport
-service, as in the case of my expedition, the baby always accompanies
-them, and I counted at least six different ways of carrying the infant.
-1. In the net-bag, slung behind, and supported by the band passed across
-the mothers forehead; to save abrasion a leaf was placed between the
-forehead and the knot made by tying the two ends of the bag together.
-Among many of the women I noted a patch of white hair, just at the point
-where the knot had pressed. 2. The child on the top of the load,
-supported by the mother’s left arm. This, of course, refers to the time
-when they were carrying for us, and had a particularly heavy burden. 3.
-Astride of one shoulder; this was practised by the men, and the infant
-was so placed as to face the side of his father’s head. 4. Also a man’s
-method, pick-a-back, with the little legs round the father’s neck. 5.
-The child with the arms clasped round the father’s neck and no other
-support at all. 6. Similar to the last, except that the child in this
-instance was carried by the mother, who, being blessed with an
-exceptional spread of “Rami” behind, could allow the little one’s feet
-to rest comfortably on that.
-
-In the village communities on the hills there was no very regular
-observance of meal times. They ate when they wanted to, but on the coast
-a meal was taken in the morning, in the afternoon, in the early evening,
-and sometimes at night. The cooking was done by the women in the round
-earthenware pots mentioned in the description of the Hanuabada potters.
-
-In point of dress and appearance the mountain people differ widely from
-those of the coast. The place of the “Rami” is taken by the cheebee, or
-perineal band, a simpler garment than even the fig-leaf. They are a
-shorter people, with better developed legs than the coast natives, which
-is no doubt owing to the extraordinary exercise imposed on the limbs by
-the difficulties of the ground.
-
-The women wear fewer adornments than the men, their principal ornaments
-being the dogs’ teeth necklace and armlet, and on the breast a pearl
-shell, ground with a stone night and day for three weeks until the outer
-shell is gone and the mother-of-pearl is left bare and polished. They
-tie up their hair with bark so that the hair itself can hardly be seen,
-and sometimes they plait it up into small tails. They carry the
-customary bag of small odds and ends, and their weapons are distinctly
-formidable. These consist of the spear and club only. The spear is
-pointed and jagged, and is made of very hard redwood; the club has a
-heavy stone top, elaborately hewn into sharp bosses. The Dinawa people
-do not know how to make these clubs, which are manufactured in the
-Keakama district, and their presence in the hills proves that there is
-some system of commercial distribution.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- 1.—A STONE-HEADED CLUB.
-
- 2.—VARIOUS FORMS OF THE BAU-BAU, OR TOBACCO PIPE, SHOWING DIFFERENT
- KINDS OF ORNAMENTATION.
-
- Note on the left of the pipes the butt of one, showing how the end is
- closed by the natural section of bamboo.
-
- 3.—A STONE AXE.
-]
-
-But the most splendid of all the articles of the Papuan costume is the
-feather head-dress, 16 feet high, which forms the central point of
-attraction when it occurs in a tribal dance. This ornament is extremely
-rare, and is always an heirloom, for it has taken generations to
-complete. It is a wonderful, fantastic device of feathers, built upon a
-light framework. The Bird of Paradise and the Gaura pigeon are laid
-under tribute for its construction, and the feathers of the different
-birds, and of different species of the same bird, are kept carefully
-apart, and are arranged in rows according to their natural order. A few
-lines of Bird of Paradise, a few lines of Gaura pigeon, then a few lines
-of another species of Bird of Paradise, and so on. The whole contrivance
-is most fantastic, and looks really impressive in the weird light of the
-torches as the dancers, decorated with flowing bunches of grass behind,
-proceed with their revel.
-
-The dances of the hill tribes are not elaborate in form, and consist
-principally of violent jumping up and down, accompanied by wild singing
-and noise, but the coast dances, as carried out by the members of the
-native police at Port Moresby, by permission of the authorities,
-although less effective in point of costume—for little dress at all is
-worn—have something of the orderly and progressive arrangement of the
-ballet of civilisation. On the day set apart for the dance at Port
-Moresby, a circle of native drummers would seat themselves on the
-ground, and would begin their monotonous performance—bang, bang, bang;
-bang, bang, bang—apparently without end, and with a wearisomely
-monotonous rhythm. Suddenly, to the orchestra and the spectators would
-enter two members of the Fly River police off duty, carrying a long,
-thin reed. These would begin the performance. They jumped up and down in
-regular rhythm, crouching lower and lower as the dance proceeded, their
-movements getting quicker and quicker as the drums “gave them pepper.”
-Then, still crouching and still jumping up and down with incredible
-swiftness, they would back out and disappear round the side of the
-house. This ended the first figure. For the second figure probably
-twenty of the force would enter, marching sedately in Indian file, the
-drums playing a slower rhythm. Suddenly the performers would stop, then
-they would turn their heads from side to side, and begin to move their
-legs slowly in time to the drums. Still wagging their heads, and without
-any increased motion of the limbs, they would proceed right round the
-ring of spectators and retire, without any perceptible quickening of
-pace. For the third figure they reappeared in files, moving their heads,
-the limbs still going in slow time. They advanced and retreated to and
-from the spectators several times, singing as they went, and finally
-backed out.
-
-We witnessed also a dance of the Mombare people, who are likewise
-members of the native police. With the dancers was one woman. Their
-method was to jump up and down, and thus they worked slowly round the
-oval enclosure formed by spectators. They held themselves erect all the
-time, and their demeanour was not serious, the dance being accompanied
-by loud shouting and great perspiration. During all these dances the
-Orgiasts fell into a terrible state of excitement, and often could not
-stop dancing until they fell quite exhausted. Mountain dances are
-sometimes accompanied by tragedies, for the confusion of the revel is
-made the occasion for wiping off old scores, and a dancer will suddenly
-fall dead, struck through by the spear of his enemy.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XVI
- _BURIAL, WITCHCRAFT, AND OTHER THEMES_
-
-A Short-lived Race—An Aged Man a Curiosity—Burial Customs—The Chief
-Mourner painted Black—Period of Mourning brief except for the Chief
-Mourner—No Belief in Natural Death—Poison always Suspected—Religion all
-but absent—Vague Belief in Magic—Fi-fi a Form of Divination—How
-practised—Its Utter Childishness—No Idea of Number—Forest Warnings—
-“Wada,” another Form of Sorcery—Mavai’s Hideous Magical Compounds—A
-People seemingly without History or Legends—Pictures understood—Fear of
-the Stereoscope—The “Bau-bau” or Social Pipe—How Made and Smoked—
-Incidents of Travel—The Stinging Trees—Ideas of Medicine—Sovereign
-Remedies—Bleeding—How practised—Hunting—The Corral—A Strange Delicacy—
-Story of Native Trust in Me—A Loan of Beads—Children and their Sports—
-Thirty Ways of Cat’s-Cradle.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XVI
- BURIAL, WITCHCRAFT, AND OTHER THEMES
-
-
-The Papuans are not a long-lived race. The mountain people die off about
-forty: at Googooli, high up on the mountains, we saw one very old man,
-who may have been sixty years of age—the only example of longevity that
-we came across. He was a very pathetic spectacle: his features were
-almost gone, the skin was terribly shrivelled, and the eyes sunken. He
-was bent almost double, and had a long white beard. His fellow-tribesmen
-regarded him as a great curiosity, and brought him to see us. Despite
-the decrepitude of his body, however, there was no trace of senility:
-his senses were unimpaired; and the poor old creature showed great
-gratitude for a gift of tobacco.
-
-Of the mountain people’s burial customs I have no precise knowledge, but
-at Hanuabada we were able to observe a coast funeral. The dead body was
-wrapped in a net and lashed to a pole, which was borne by two bearers.
-To the funeral, which was celebrated the morning after death, the whole
-village turned out, and followed the corpse without any regard to
-precedence, except that the chief mourner—in this case, the mother—
-walked immediately behind the bier. The chief mourner is invariably
-blacked all over with charcoal, but the others wear no token of sorrow.
-Just as the procession started the women set up a tremendous wailing,
-which was continued all the way to the grave. On reaching the
-burial-place, which was some seven minutes’ walk from the village, the
-corpse was set down, and the mother, seating herself at its head,
-encircled it with her arms, the hands being clasped below the chin, and
-began with shrill cries to try to call her son back to life. For twenty
-minutes, while the shallow grave was being dug, this ceremony proceeded,
-while the rest of the mourners sat around. The corpse was then lifted
-into the grave without much reverence and was covered up, the mourners
-waiting until this was done, whereupon they walked away and, as far as
-they were concerned, the mourning was over, and far from being a cause
-of sorrow, it had become merely an interesting topic of conversation.
-The chief mourner, however, if a woman, keeps the house, and sees no one
-after the funeral for a space that may extend to three weeks. It is
-indeed very difficult to persuade a mourner to leave the house. Another
-method of disposal of the dead is tree-burial. A light framework of
-bamboo or sticks is laid in the fork of a tree. On this the corpse,
-wrapped in bark, is exposed. When nature has done its work on the
-remains, the bones are afterwards distributed among the friends of the
-deceased.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- 1.—YOUNG NATIVES’ CURIOSITY ABOUT MY CAMERA.
-
- 2.—WOMEN CARRIERS ON THE WAY TO PORT MORESBY.
-]
-
-They do not believe in a natural death, and attribute every decease to
-poison in a vague and general sort of way. Belief in another world they
-have none, and the most elementary ideas of religion do not seem to
-exist. There is not even any definite superstition, but only a sort of
-vague and particularly childish belief in some kind of magic under the
-name of “Fi-fi.” This is a sort of divination, and is practised at night
-by a recognised medium, usually a girl, who is “Fi-fi,” and yet who is,
-at the same time, believed to represent this mysterious power known as
-“Fi-fi.”
-
-Fi-fi is supposed to be a spirit always invisible and occasionally
-audible. It is considered a bringer of both good and bad luck, but
-although this is so no attempt is made to propitiate it. The cult indeed
-is so absurd that the wonder is that the people believe in it at all;
-yet, although there is apparently nothing supernatural on the face of
-it, the Papuans are willing to credit its manifestations. When a tribe
-wishes to know its luck, and when a hostile attack is imminent, it has
-recourse to the rites of Fi-fi; these are always celebrated at night.
-The crowd gathers round the fire, and the girl who is supposed to be the
-medium of the power is told off to communicate with Fi-fi; from that
-moment, by a peculiar confusion in their minds between the spirit and
-the medium, she becomes Fi-fi to all intents and purposes. She retires
-to some corner near at hand, where she is not seen, and from there she
-whistles in different keys. The sound is made entirely at the medium’s
-discretion, but the moment it is heard the people exclaim that Fi-fi has
-come, and they judge by the whistling whether the omens are favourable
-or not. They would seem to have an idea of two Fi-fis, for the girl’s
-first call is two short notes repeated. No immediate answer comes, and
-the people round the fire remark casually to each other that the other
-Fi-fi has not heard, but they say, “Gua-fua”—that is, “Wait.” The girl
-whistles again, and in a moment or two answers herself; then the
-listeners round the fire exclaim, “Oi-kai-yoi, Fi-fi-mai” (“You hear,
-Fi-fi has come”). Occasionally we have said to them, “Tell Fi-fi to
-speak,” but they refused point-blank; and when we asked them why they
-did not bring Fi-fi, they said they could not. The priestess varied her
-whistle, and then interpreted her own messages. Once a woman is chosen
-to communicate with Fi-fi, she retains the office for life. This form of
-divination occurred most frequently at Waley.
-
-The priestess is not above the Delphic trick of framing her oracles to
-suit political necessity or her own inclinations and likings. One would
-think that people of such general common sense as the Papuans would see
-the possibility of deception, but they have implicit faith in Fi-fi’s
-manifestations.
-
-Certain insects, I noted, were also regarded as “Fi-fi.” When a
-particular species of fire-fly entered the house at night the natives
-immediately predicted bad luck, or impending attack and extermination by
-hostile tribes. This failure of intelligence at one point is paralleled
-by their inability to grasp the simplest idea of number. Further than
-three they cannot count, although we often tried, by means of their ten
-fingers, to instil some notions of a higher calculus into them.
-
-On the march we observed the existence of a curious system of warnings.
-Now and then a green bough, newly broken off, would be found lying in
-the path, and the sight of this almost drives the natives out of their
-wits; for it is the recognised symbol that some one has been there who
-does not want you to pass. It has a correlative in a friendly symbol,
-which is also a broken bough, but in this instance it is not entirely
-severed from the tree.
-
-Another superstition is “Wada,” which, as far as one can ascertain,
-seems to be a belief in an invisible man who stands near a tree, but is
-so like it that he cannot be seen. As you go through the forest “Wada”
-may touch you, and then you are doomed. After this there is nothing for
-you to do but go home and die; and so great is the power of suggestion,
-that a person who believes he has been touched by “Wada” generally does
-die.
-
-Mavai practised “Wada,” but it took a somewhat pharmaceutical form with
-him. He made an abominable mixture of rotten bananas, and all sorts of
-decomposing matter. This he kept in his house and gave to persons he
-wanted to be rid of, generally without any evil effect, but that never
-shook his belief in the efficacy of his decoctions. It was delightfully
-comical to see the seriousness with which he sat compounding his horrid
-messes, and telling you of their dire results. It may be wondered how
-ever he got the dread substance administered; but then, of course, Mavai
-was all-powerful, and the person who refused to take his “Wada” drugs
-would probably have encountered “Wada”—a sure and certain “Wada”—in the
-person of Mavai himself.
-
-There was also some confusion of “Wada” with a stone or a stick, and
-therein probably one might find the truth about the real deadliness of
-the charm.
-
-The Papuans are entirely without history as a people, and of personal
-tradition they have only the merest scraps. At Port Moresby they had a
-legend of an eclipse, and referred to it as “Labi labi” (that is,
-“night”). They have no tales of gods or heroes, and their chief interest
-is the question, “Where are you going?” and “What are you doing?”
-
-They were very keen to see our photographs, and had no difficulty in
-understanding a picture: therein they differed greatly from the debased
-Australian aborigines, who could never grasp the graphic symbol, and in
-the famous instance, when shown a picture of Queen Victoria, said it was
-a ship. They picked out their friends’ photographs at once, and
-recognised them with exclamations of delight. For one of our men,
-however, our stereoscope proved too much, as the relief of the figures
-had probably been too realistic; and on being invited to look at a group
-of our retainers, he no sooner put his eyes to the glass than he howled
-and nearly dropped the instrument. He ran away, saying, “Mookau meego”
-(“Man lives there”), and could not be persuaded to look again.
-
-I hope that during my next journey I may be able to pierce more deeply
-into the psychology of the Papuans, and it may be that, with greater
-familiarity, they will communicate more of what they know; for it
-appears improbable that they should be as destitute as they seem of
-legend or myth.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- SMOKING THE BAU-BAU.
-
- This curious pipe is made of a length of bamboo closed at each end.
- Into a small hole at one end is inserted a small green leaf rolled
- like a grocer’s paper bag. In this the lighted tobacco is placed.
- The smoker then reverses the tube, and sucks in the smoke until the
- bamboo is filled. He now takes out the tobacco and inhales a long
- whiff. The operation is repeated as long as the tobacco lasts.
-]
-
-Over the “Bau-bau,” or social pipe, I trust there may be some
-discoveries in store for me. The Papuan pipe is itself a most
-interesting instrument, not only in its everyday use, but in its
-construction and in the method of smoking. It is made of one joint of
-bamboo, closed at both ends by the natural section of the bamboo. In the
-side of the cylinder near one end they drill a hole by applying a piece
-of hard wood made red-hot. They press the red-hot wood to the bamboo,
-and blow it to incandescence, repeating the operation until a hole is
-pierced. They next knock a hole in the opposite end of the bamboo, so as
-to admit a current of air. The red-hot wood is now applied again to the
-original hole, and they blow through the hole knocked in the opposite
-end until the small hole in the side is gradually enlarged. The
-“Bau-bau” is now complete, except for its ornamentation. Elaborate
-patterns are scratched on the hard enamel of the bamboo with glass, a
-knife, a stone, or red-hot wood, and the speed with which this
-decoration is accomplished is extraordinary.
-
-In the accompanying illustration I show some of the prevailing patterns.
-On the march our men would cut a bamboo, and on reaching camp would
-borrow some suitable tool from us, and make a pipe in a very short time.
-They were sufficiently accomplished smokers, however, to like an old
-“Bau-bau” best, and gave the reason, which will be appreciated by every
-smoker, that tobacco is not good in a new one.
-
-The method of smoking is elaborate. They roll a leaf into a little horn,
-and insert it in the smaller hole on the side of the “Bau-bau,” within
-this leaf is placed the charge of tobacco which they light, and then
-placing their lips to the end hole they draw. The little horn, or
-cigarette as one may call it, is now removed from the hole in the side,
-and if the pipe is new they blow away the first charge of smoke, by
-placing their lips to the hole in which the cigarette was originally
-inserted. Again the cigarette is placed in the small hole, and the pipe
-is drawn from the end hole. This time the smoke is intended to be used,
-so the cigarette is removed from the small hole, and the smoker applying
-his lips thereto inhales the whole charge. Again the cigarette is
-removed, and the pipe is filled by a long pull at the end hole, but this
-time the smoker does not inhale the charge himself, but removes the
-cigarette and politely hands the charged pipe to his neighbour, who
-punctiliously rubs the mouthpiece, and enjoys the long whiff. Very often
-there is one drawer for an entire party, whose duty it is to fill the
-pipe with smoke, and pass it so filled to each of his companions in
-turn.
-
-They usually sit in a circle for these smoking parties; and in camp the
-“Bau-bau” is continually used. They grow their own tobacco, which is
-very rank, and not good smoking at all. In fact, the natives themselves
-cannot inhale much, as it makes them giddy; and they are not
-infrequently seized with severe fits of coughing when the fumes have
-proved particularly suffocating.
-
-The supply of tobacco is carried in the armlet or behind the ear—this
-last method being not unknown to the festive Cockney, who, on Bank
-Holiday, is seldom complete without a cigarette so worn.
-
-The pipe at the end of the day’s march was invariably well earned, for
-the heartiness and endurance of my carriers were almost incredible. On
-one occasion I despatched a party to one of my camps, thirty miles
-distant, through an almost inaccessible mountain region. They left at
-eight o’clock in the morning, and came into camp again at five in the
-afternoon of the following day, having accomplished the whole journey of
-sixty miles, and the latter half while they were burdened with their
-loads of rice, tinned provisions, tobacco and hardware, and all the
-other miscellaneous articles known as “trade.” The women’s loads weighed
-about 50 lbs., the men’s somewhat less, for the women are the great
-burden-bearers in New Guinea.
-
-The difficulties of our march were heightened by certain natural
-features, particularly the stinging trees, which occurred close to
-Madui. The tree in shape, size, and foliage resembles a sycamore, and
-has a leaf of which the under side is extremely rough and covered with
-spines. These possess a stinging power like that of the nettle, only
-much worse, and the irritation lasts far longer. The slightest touch is
-sufficient to wound. First a white blister appears, then redness,
-covering about a square inch around each pustule; rubbing aggravates the
-irritation, which shortly becomes maddening. The pain is not allayed for
-at least twelve hours; and I have never observed any natural antidote
-growing in the vicinity of this stinging-tree, as the dock-leaf grows
-near the nettle. Needless to say, the natives take the utmost care to
-give these trees a wide berth.
-
-A smaller stinging-plant, resembling our nettle, only larger, with a
-rough under side of pale pea-green, is also found at intervals in the
-forest; both sides of the leaf possess the power of irritation. The
-natives use it as a universal specific for all ailments. As soon as they
-come on a clump of this plant the women discard their loads and gather
-bundles of the leaves, which they carefully preserve for future
-requirements. It is also applied probably for the sheer pleasure of it
-when they have no actual disorder, and it is quite common for them to
-rub their bodies lightly with the leaves. This causes violent
-irritation, followed by a feeling of pleasant numbness, like that which
-results from the application of menthol. For a mosquito bite this is a
-most admirable remedy, since the irritation of the bite is allayed and
-goes down long before the irritation of the leaf has passed. It is a
-curious example of the old medical practice of counter-irritation.
-Although we were glad to resort to it for mosquito bites, no European
-would without that cause risk the irritation for the sake of possible
-future benefits.
-
-While on the subject of Papuan sovereign remedies, I may mention a
-curious form of bleeding which is in use among the tribes, especially
-among the younger men. The bleeding is performed by two persons, who sit
-opposite to each other. The operator takes a small drill, or rather
-probe of cassowary bone brought to an extremely fine point, and this is
-attached to the string of a tiny bow about 4 inches long. Holding the
-bow as if he were going to shoot, the operator aims the little probe at
-the patient’s forehead, draws the bow slowly, and lets the string go;
-the probe is thus brought into sharp contact with the patient’s skin,
-and the operation of drawing the bow and letting fly the arrow is
-repeated again and again until blood is drawn. It should be remembered
-that the probe or arrow is always attached to the string and never
-escapes. The patient now leans forward, and the blood is allowed to flow
-profusely on to the ground.
-
-I have often seen as much as half a pint allowed to escape. When
-faintness supervenes the wound is staunched with ashes or any convenient
-styptic, and the patient sits up. If the ashes fail to act, cautery with
-a hot cinder is practised. Headache is the usual trouble for which this
-remedy is applied, and this frequency of bleeding may be the reason why
-there is no heart disease or sudden death among the natives. This may
-probably lend colour to the theory of some physicians, that the increase
-of heart disease and sudden death in civilised nations is due to the
-entire abandonment of bleeding, once certainly carried to excess.
-
-Although the women do all the hard work of the house and in the field,
-they are nevertheless regarded with affection. It is erroneous to
-suppose that they are compelled to be burden-bearers because they are
-lightly esteemed. As far as my own observation goes, the men are left
-free of loads, or are given lighter loads, in order that they may be
-ready to protect the women from the sudden raids of other tribes. Their
-gardens are often a considerable distance from the village, and the
-women never go to gather yams or taro, or to till their patches, without
-an escort of young men as protectors.
-
-On the other hand, the men are not idle, but perform their part in the
-economic system by acting as hunters. Their chief game is the pig, the
-cassowary, and the wallaby. They hunt this quarry with spears, and drive
-the game into nets which have been spread between the trees and posts in
-the forest over a considerable area, forming a corral, approached by a
-long decoy, two long lines of nets gradually converging. When the nets
-have been set the drive commences. The beaters extend themselves for a
-considerable distance, and, with the assistance of dogs, gradually force
-the game towards the nets. The game is plentiful, and as it closes
-towards the corral, birds and beasts are forced into the centre in
-crowds. At length the hunters close round the opening, a final rush is
-made, and the victims are despatched with spears. These hunting bouts
-occur only at long intervals, and on the lower slopes of the mountains.
-After a successful drive there is a great jollification. Fires are built
-in the camp, the game is roasted, and in an incredibly short space of
-time every portion has disappeared, and the people are lying around
-gorged.
-
-In one particular delicacy favoured by the Papuans I was, as an
-entomologist, very much interested. The natives are exceedingly fond of
-the larvæ of a large tropical beetle, one of the _Passalidæ_, which are
-found in decayed tree trunks. Whenever the natives noticed the presence
-of the borings made by the larvæ, they seized a native instrument,
-probably one of their stone axes, dug out the dainty, which is about
-five inches long, and ate it raw. Should a fire be handy, they would
-sometimes throw the larvæ into the ashes, give it a turn or two, and
-then enjoy it: the flavour is said to resemble that of a lemon. I could
-never, however, bring myself to try it.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- A PAPUAN HUNT.
-
- The natives drive their game, chiefly the pig, the cassowary, and the
- wallaby (a small kangaroo) into a corral, and then despatch the
- quarry with spears.
-]
-
-The Papuans are a jovial, light-hearted people, and when a stranger has
-once won their confidence they are hospitable and friendly. Their trust
-when once gained will stand even rather severe tests, as I found to my
-great satisfaction and advantage after a stay of some months at Mount
-Kebea. I was anxious to push farther into the interior, but found myself
-absolutely without beads, which are the journey money of the explorer.
-It would have delayed me too long to have waited for the return of my
-messengers, who had been sent to the coast for a further supply, so I
-hit upon the expedient of trying how far my credit with the natives
-would go. I called the tribe—men, women, and children—together, and in a
-lengthy harangue I explained the situation to them; finally asking them
-if they would lend me their beads, which every one of them wore on his
-or her person in considerable profusion, promising them that on my
-return I would pay them double the quantity. This tribe, be it noted,
-was not to accompany me farther, and the beads would have to be given to
-other bearers, whom I should engage as I proceeded. These ornamentations
-are to the Papuans as precious as her pearls are to a _grande dame_,
-but, nevertheless, every man, woman, and child immediately consented to
-the loan. This appreciation of the idea of credit—one might almost say
-of banking—denotes a considerable receptivity of mind, and shows that
-the Papuan cannot be inaccessible to civilisation.
-
-I cannot pass from the subject of the Papuan at home without saying
-something about his children, who are the merriest little creatures
-imaginable. Without being very demonstrative, the parents like them well
-enough, and the child is not at all hardly used—although, be it
-remembered, the family pig has a deeper place in the adults’ affections.
-In times of stress it is to be feared it is the pig that is first
-considered, probably because it is so important an article of diet. The
-devotion to this animal goes far further than that of Pat, for it is not
-unusual to see a Papuan woman acting as foster-mother to a young pig.
-
-But to return to the children; up to the age of seven their life is one
-long holiday, and they very early begin to practise the use of weapons.
-Spearthrowing is their favourite sport; for this they use a long stick
-of grass with an enlarged root. They pull off all the leaves until the
-shaft is clean, and the root is allowed to remain to represent the heavy
-head of the spear. Their targets are each other, and at a very early age
-they have acquired a marvellous dexterity, hitting each other with
-nicest accuracy even at 40 feet range. Every hit is registered with a
-delighted jump and a howl. The amount of cleverness and dexterity
-required for this spear practice was realised by my son, who tried it,
-and found that not only could he not hit, but he could not make the
-spear carry. Very small girls play also at spearthrowing, but they give
-it up early.
-
-We were very much amused to find the presence of “Cat’s-Cradle”; we had
-thought to amuse the little ones by teaching them this game, but we
-found that they were already more than our masters therein; for they no
-sooner saw what we were after than they let us know that they were well
-acquainted with it, and whereas we had just the old stereotyped process
-to give them, they showed us thirty different ways. They did not,
-however, play in pairs as we do, the players taking the string from each
-other’s hands in turn, but each child sits by himself or herself and
-works out the pattern. It is really amusing to see how they effect the
-different changes and the regular routine of forms by the movement of
-the fingers alone, without the aid of another pair of hands.
-
-The dogs at Epa and Port Moresby were highly favoured animals. Not only
-had they the run of the house, but each house had an entrance sacred to
-the dog. To this access was given by special dog-ladders 9 inches wide,
-with the rungs quite a foot apart, up and down which the animals ran
-like monkeys.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XVII
- _A NOTE ON BRITISH TRADE PROSPECTS IN NEW GUINEA_
-
-Sandalwood—The Sea-Slug—Copra and Cocoa-Nut—Coffee—Cocoa—Chillies—
-Rubber—Stock-Raising—Gold—Tobacco—Imports—German Enterprise—Our Lost
-Coaling Station.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XVII
- A NOTE ON BRITISH TRADE PROSPECTS IN
- NEW GUINEA
-
-
-The intelligent observer of New Guinea cannot fail to recognise that the
-country presents a vast unopened field for the development of British
-trade. Many sources of wealth are as yet absolutely untouched, but
-experiments that have recently been made in coffee, tobacco, cocoa, and
-rubber, yield the richest promise. The geographical configuration of the
-coast will greatly aid the enterprising trader, for many centres of
-industry can easily be approached by water at such inlets as Hall Sound,
-and the cost of transport from the interior would consequently be a mere
-bagatelle.
-
-One of the chief industries is sandalwood cutting. The sandalwood is
-found in arid, elevated regions, and the particular spots where the
-trees grow in any quantity are known to the trade as patches. These
-patches, however, do not signify that the trees grow closely together.
-One tree might be found here and another might not occur for a hundred
-yards or so; but still there is an area of sandalwood growth
-sufficiently definite to justify the title “patch.” For any one who
-understands the intricacies of the situation, and the proper method of
-going to work, there is something to be made; but at present the
-development of the trade is beset with difficulties which can only be
-surmounted by one who is thoroughly familiar with the country and the
-conditions.
-
-A rich source of income, still only little worked, is the trade in
-_béche-de-mer_, the sea-slug, which is an indispensable article of
-seasoning in every Chinese kitchen. This commands £70 a ton in the China
-market, and the variety known as the “black fish” fetches as much as
-£100 a ton. It is used for thickening gravies and soups. These molluscs
-are about 9 inches long and 3 inches thick, and are to be found adhering
-to the corals. The Papuans dive for them, and when they have secured
-them they are split open, dried in the sun, and packed in boxes. This
-trade could be made very profitable to any capable operator who cared to
-embark a moderate capital in its development. Divers can be had for a
-little tobacco or a few shells, a knife or an axe, but the chief expense
-is the preparation and preservation for the market. As a matter of fact,
-an enterprising Brisbane firm has lately introduced the tinning system
-for this mollusc, but the China market is supplied with the dried
-commodity untinned.
-
-There is also much to be done in copra and in cocoanut products
-generally. Large cocoanut plantations pay well, as every part of the
-tree can be utilised, and there is no doubt that a great deal of
-business can be done with Java, which at present cannot produce enough
-cocoanut fibre for its mat industry, and actually brings consignments
-all the way from Ceylon. The copra is in great demand amongst
-soap-makers, and one large firm has prospectors at work in the interior
-of the islands with a view to increasing the supply. To my own knowledge
-efforts are being made to extend this trade, by several Europeans, east
-and west of Hall Sound, but there is plenty of room for others without
-in any way damaging the prosperity of the industry.
-
-[Illustration:
-
- HAULING UP A LOG FOR BUILDING THE CAMP AT DINAWA
-]
-
-New Guinea is favourable to the production of coffee, although the plant
-is not indigenous to the island. A fine quality is grown at Wariratti.
-The plantations are flourishing, but here again the enterprise is still
-young. The trade is so new that the experimental stage is hardly passed.
-It cannot be doubted that Australia offers a vast and lucrative market
-to the future coffee grower of New Guinea.
-
-Cocoa and chillies thrive in the Mekeo region, and this district is also
-very rich in fruit. The Government at Port Moresby often sends down a
-sailing vessel to bring back large consignments of fruit for the
-convicts in Port Moresby jail. The fruit-farmer might find in the Mekeo
-region a richer California.
-
-In about the same condition as the coffee is the rubber trade. Trees are
-found throughout the possession, and the natives have some understanding
-of the method of collecting the sap. Their operations are, however, very
-crude and rough. I question whether the New Guinea rubber would ever
-rival in excellence the South American variety (_hevea Braziliensis_),
-which is undoubtedly the finest in the market, although Ceylon is just
-commencing to send rubber which may run it hard.
-
-To the stock-raiser New Guinea offers a tempting field. At the Mission
-of the Sacred Heart on Yule Island I saw remarkably fine cattle—cows and
-oxen—which had doubtless been introduced from Australia. Not only the
-headquarters of the Mission, but the outlying stations, were plentifully
-supplied with milk and butter, and, at the time I was there, they hoped
-to be in a position to kill a beast a week, an important consideration,
-for fresh meat is valuable in New Guinea. I did not see sheep in New
-Guinea at all, but goats were met with at Hall Sound, although they are
-not raised in any great numbers. On Yule Island the pasturage is
-splendid, and drought, that terror of the Australian squatter, is by no
-means frequent.
-
-Turning to the mineral wealth, for the past five years gold workings
-have been carried on at the Yodda Fields, on the Mombare River, in the
-north-east portion of the island. The gold is alluvial. Although I
-cannot give the exact figures of the output, some idea of the
-productiveness of the region may be obtained from the fact that, for the
-last five years, 150 miners have been able to live on these fields. When
-it is remembered that the price of provisions at the Yodda Camp is
-prohibitive, it is not an extravagant assumption to compute that each
-man must be turning out at least three ounces of gold per week to make
-it worth his while to remain. There are other workings in the Woodlark
-Islands, and there are certainly evidences of gold everywhere in the
-streams of New Guinea. It does not seem likely that the miners are
-turning their earnings to the best account at the present time. The
-local stores, of course, consume a great deal of their dust, and when a
-man has got a fair pile together he not infrequently goes down to
-Samarai, and has what he calls “a good time,” returning with empty
-pockets to begin his labour over again. I believe the Government is now
-making a road to the Yodda Fields, and when this is completed, the
-longer route will be abandoned, and provisions on the fields will be
-cheaper.
-
-As regards imports for commerce with the natives, the chief desiderata
-are the articles technically known as “trade,” with which the labour to
-be used for developing the exports is remunerated. The native generally
-desires to receive from the white man knives, axes, tobacco, Jews’
-harps, beads, dogs’ teeth, and red calico; but it is to the exports that
-the enterprising trader has to look in the future.
-
-The finest field for enterprise in New Guinea—and one which I have
-therefore left to the last to be dealt with—is tobacco. The district of
-Mekeo produces a magnificent leaf, of which the seed has been imported
-from Cuba. The syndicate that imported the leaf applied to the
-Government for 100,000 acres of land in the central division of British
-New Guinea, but this request was opposed by the New South Wales
-Government, without reason vouchsafed to the Government of the
-possession, whose officials in a recent report described this action as
-“a very serious blow to the immediate development of the country by
-Australian capitalists of high standing.” The same report, while
-deploring this misfortune, remarks that the tobacco should do very well
-if the leaf is properly treated for the market, as the soil appears to
-be very rich. Very different was the action of the German authorities in
-the Kaiser’s New Guinea possessions. With their usual indefatigable
-enterprise, the Teutons have financed a large tobacco undertaking, and
-are exporting the leaf in great quantities. Their syndicate has so far
-introduced methods of civilised trade that they have struck and issued
-their own coinage (which bears the image of a bird of paradise), and
-their five-mark, two-mark, and one-mark pieces are accepted by the
-natives instead of trade. These pieces are, of course, spent by the
-natives in the German stores. Not without reason did the Prince of Wales
-advise Great Britain to wake up.
-
-With all these extraordinary opportunities, it is a curious fact that,
-as regards shipping, the island is in a worse position for trade than it
-was twenty years ago. Even as recently as 1902, the _Moresby_ was
-calling every five weeks at Port Moresby, but now her route has been
-changed, and she sails from Sydney to Singapore, calling at Port Moresby
-only once every two and a half months. In the interval goods and mails
-are carried in an erratic manner by a little steamer called the _Parua_,
-by the _Merrie England_ (a Government survey boat), or by the _St.
-Andrew_, the Sacred Heart Mission boat. Two small sailing vessels, it is
-true, sail between Cook Town and Samarai, but this does not improve the
-communication with Port Moresby, the seat of Government, as these
-vessels make no call there. It is almost incredible that the second
-largest island in the world—the “Pearl of the East,” probably the
-richest region in proportion to its size that Great Britain has the
-option of developing—is thus left hermit-like in the midst of the
-eastern seas. It is the more surprising when it is remembered that New
-Guinea lies directly on the trade route between Sydney and the great
-commercial centres of China and Japan. We might have had a magnificent
-coaling station on the east coast of the island, in the Dampier Strait,
-but for the action of Lord Derby, when he permitted the Germans to
-extend their possessions so as to occupy almost a quarter of the eastern
-peninsula of the island. As matters stand now, a coaling station could
-only be established at such a point on the south-eastern coast that
-vessels coming and going from Sydney would have to double the south-east
-cape, thus making an awkward and almost impossible détour in these days
-when time is more than ever the essence of every shipping contract.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XVIII
- _NOTES ON SOME BIRDS OF NEW GUINEA_
-
-The Birds of Paradise—Remarkable Species observed—Native Names—
-Play-Places—Curious Habits—The Bower-Bird: Artist, Architect, and
-Gardener.
-
-
-
-
- CHAPTER XVIII
- NOTES ON SOME BIRDS OF NEW GUINEA
-
-
-New Guinea is remarkable for its paucity of mammals and its richness in
-birds. As we have already noted, at least 770 different species of birds
-are known, and to these doubtless many more will be added as the
-explorer ventures farther into the interior. The chief haunts of the
-blue bird of paradise, the _Paradisornis Rudolphi_, are in Central
-British New Guinea, at an altitude of from 4000 to 6000 feet. There are
-about a dozen species of the bird of paradise, and at Mafulu we obtained
-the following, of which I give, where possible, the native name:—
-
- Lophorina atra Wagoda.
- Epimachus magnus Yawvee.
- Astrapia stephaniæ Beebee.
- Parotia Lawsii Aliga.
- Diphyllodis speciosa Kellolo.
- Ptiloris magnifica ——
-
-Besides these we found two species of bower-bird—
-
- Amblyornis subalaris.
- Laurea lori.
-
-The limit of the king bird (_Cicinnurus Regius_) was at an elevation of
-about 1500 feet. It has a brilliant crimson back, the throat crimson,
-with a green band edged with another narrow band of crimson. The breast
-is white, the beak blue, two big tail feathers curve gracefully
-outwards, and end in spatulæ of brilliant green on the upper side. There
-are also shortish plumes on each side ending in a band of green.
-
-At Ekeikei and Dinawa, but chiefly at Dinawa, were the playgrounds of
-the _Diphyllodis magnifica_. These were very remarkable. The bird
-chooses a fairly clear space among saplings ten or fifteen feet high.
-These it clears of leaves, and also the ground between, making all
-beautifully clean and level. There it dances, leaping from tree to tree,
-running along the ground for a little, and then taking to the branches
-again. Every movement is extraordinarily rapid. If any leaves are thrown
-into the enclosure the bird gets very angry, and flings them out again
-immediately.
-
-Sam told me that on the Kebea he had observed the play-place of the
-_Parotia Lawsii_, which is even more singular. The bird digs a hole, at
-least a foot in diameter, and over it places cross-sticks. Above these
-again it strews leaves and other vegetable refuse, and on the top of
-that it dances. Its playtime is the morning, but during the day it
-haunts the tops of the highest trees, and is consequently very difficult
-to come by.
-
-I was fortunate enough to be able to observe one of the latest and most
-wonderful discoveries among the birds of paradise, the _Paradisornis
-Rudolphi_, familiarly known as the blue bird of paradise. It feeds on
-the larvæ of beetles found in the umbrella head of the mountain
-pandanus. This tree has adventitious roots which spring clear of the
-ground to a height of sixty feet, and then throw out flag leaves in the
-shape of an umbrella. From the umbrella top hang fine clusters of
-scarlet fruit. The decomposition of the vegetable matter at the point
-where the leaves stretch out gives refuge to the pupæ of beetles of many
-diverse species, and these prove a great attraction to the blue bird of
-paradise, who finds them excellent eating. The bird is about the size of
-a jay, and is very gorgeous. The upper part of its wings is a sky blue;
-the side plumes are in gradations of brilliant greenish blue and
-ultramarine; when the plumes are spread there is also a band of brown
-feathers. The head resembles that of the common crow, but is smaller.
-From the upper part of the tail spring two elongated feathers with two
-light-blue spatulæ at the tips. In the same pandanus tree lives also the
-_Astrapia stephaniæ_, remarkable for its long tail, with two violet
-feathers and a white shaft. The upper part of this bird’s breast is a
-most brilliant green, with a band of copper below. In one light it
-appears shaded with violet. The back of the head is violet with gold
-iridescence. The whole length of the bird is 2 feet 6 inches.
-
-Equally wonderful is the bower-bird, at once gardener, architect, and
-artist. Not only does it build the most extraordinary nest known to
-naturalists—a long, tunnel-like bower framed like a delicate Gothic
-arch, but it actually lays out a garden. I have myself seen the
-creature’s marvellous achievement. It has definite colour-sense, for it
-picks the blossoms of orchids, and arranges them in alternate lines of
-mauve and white. The whole impulse is, of course, the universal one of
-love, for among its rows of flowers it dances to its mate. This was
-probably the prettiest and most fascinating of all the sights provided
-by nature in New Guinea, that land of surprises.
-
-
-
-
- APPENDICES
-
-
- APPENDIX I
- NEW LEPIDOPTERA DISCOVERED DURING THE EXPEDITION
-
- ┌───────────────────────┬──────────────────────┬──────────────────────┐
- │ SPECIES. │ PLACE. │ SEASON. │
- ├───────────────────────┼──────────────────────┼──────────────────────┤
- │Dicalleneura ekeikei, │Ekeikei │March and April │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Gunda kebea, spec. nov.│Mount Kebea │March to April │
- │Pseudodreata strigata, │Dinawa │.... │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Tarsolepis sommeri │Dinawa │.... │
- │ dinawensis, sub-spec.│ │ │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Pseudogargetta diversa,│Dinawa │May and June │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Osica turneri, spec. │Dinawa; Ekeikei │August and September; │
- │ nov. │ │ January and February│
- │Cascera bella, spec. │Dinawa and Mount │.... │
- │ nov. │ Kebea; Ekeikei │ │
- │Hirsutopalpis fasciata,│Ekeikei; Dinawa │January and February; │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ August │
- │Omichlis hampsoni, │Dinawa │May and June │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Omichlis dinawa, spec. │Dinawa │September │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Omichlis ochracea, │Ekeikei and Mount │.... │
- │ spec. nov. │ Kebea │ │
- │Omichlis griseola, │Ekeikei │January and February │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Omichlis pratti, spec. │Ekeikei │January and February │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Omichlis rufofasciata, │Mount Kebea │March or April │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Stauropus viridissimus,│Dinawa; Ekeikei │March and April │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Stauropus kebeæ, spec. │Mount Kebea │March and April │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Stauropus dubiosus, │Mount Kebea; Ekeikei │A series taken in │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ March and April; │
- │ │ │ January to March │
- │Stauropus bella, spec. │Ekeikei │January and February │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Stauropus dinawa, spec.│Dinawa │.... │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Stauropus pratti, spec.│Ekeikei │.... │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Notodonta irrorati │Dinawa │May and June │
- │ viridis, spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Cerura multipunctata, │Dinawa │May and June │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Thyatira dinawa │Dinawa │September │
- │Thyatira ekeikei, spec.│Ekeikei │January and February │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Parazeuzera celæna, │Dinawa │August │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Parazeuzera aurea, │Dinawa │September │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Scopelodes dinawa, │Dinawa │August │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Scopelodes nitens, │Dinawa │.... │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Birthama dinawa, spec. │Dinawa │.... │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Contheyla pratti, spec.│Dinawa │August │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Contheyla ekeikei, │Ekeikei │March and April │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Contheyla birthama, │Ekeikei │January and February │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Dinawa rufa, spec. nov.│Dinawa │July and September │
- │Dinawa nigricans, spec.│Dinawa │August and September │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Pygmæomorpha modesta, │Dinawa │August │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Pygmseomorpha brunnea, │Dinawa │August │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Lasiolimacos pratti, │Dinawa; Ekeikei │August and September; │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ January and February│
- │Lasiolimacos kenricki, │Dinawa │.... │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Lasiolimacos │Ekeikei │January to February │
- │ ferruginea, spec. │ │ │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Euproctis rubroradiata,│Dinawa │August and March │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Euproctis pratti, spec.│Dinawa │August │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Euproctis irregularis, │Dinawa; Aroa River │September │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Euproctis albociliata, │Ekeikei │January │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Euproctis │Ekeikei; Mount Kebea │.... │
- │ novaguinensis, spec. │ │ │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Euproctis sublutea, │Dinawa; Mount Kebea │June and July; March │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ and April │
- │Diversosexus bicolor, │Dinawa │.... │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Anthela ekeikei, spec. │Ekeikei │.... │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Dasychira subnigra, │Dinawa │August │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Dasychira │Dinawa │September │
- │ subnigropunctata, │ │ │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Dasychira brunnea, │Dinawa │August │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Dasychira minor, spec. │Dinawa │August │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Dasychira kenricki │Dinawa │June to August │
- │Dasychiroides obsoleta,│Owen Stanley range │.... │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Dasychiroides │Dinawa and generally │.... │
- │ nigrostrigata, spec. │ distributed │ │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Dasychiroides pratti, │Dinawa; Ekeikei │July and August; │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ January and February│
- │Dasychiroides bicolora,│Dinawa; Mount Kebea │ │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Dasychiroides │Dinawa │.... │
- │ brunneostrigata, │ │ │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Lymantria ekeikei, │Ekeikei │January and February │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Lymantria kebea, spec. │Mount Kebea │.... │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Imaus niveus, spec. │Ekeikei and Mount │March and April │
- │ nov. │ Kebea │ │
- │Imaus spodea, spec. │Dinawa; Ekeikei and │August; March and │
- │ nov. │ Mount Kebea │ April │
- │Imaus aroa, spec. nov │Aroa River │January │
- │Nervicompressa │Dinawa │July to September │
- │ unistrigata, spec. │ │ │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Nervicompressa lunulata│Dinawa │August │
- │Nervicompressa │Dinawa │August │
- │ albomaculata, spec. │ │ │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Nervicompressa dubia, │Dinawa │September │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Nervicompressa kebea, │Kebea │March and April │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Nervicompressa aroa, │Aroa River │..... │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Lasiochra pulchra, │Dinawa │August and September │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Squamosala │Dinawa │August │
- │ nigrostigmata, spec. │ │ │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Taragama dinawa, spec. │Dinawa │Taken in May and June,│
- │ nov. │ │ and again in August │
- │ │ │ and September │
- │Taragama rubiginea, │Dinawa │August │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Taragama proserpina, │Dinawa │August │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Arguda pratti, spec. │Ekeikei │January │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Isostigena bicellata, │Dinawa │Taken in May and again│
- │ spec. nov. │ │ in August │
- │Sporostigena uniformis,│Dinawa │..... │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Odonestis │Dinawa │August │
- │ centralistrigata, │ │ │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Caviria dinawa, spec. │Dinawa │September │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Porthesia ekeikei, │Ekeikei │March to April │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Euproctis swinhœi, │Mount Kebea │March to April │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Euproctis virginea, │Ekeikei │January to April │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Euproctis parallelaria,│Dinawa │August and September │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Euproctis kebea, spec. │Mount Kebea │March │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Euproctis dinawa, spec.│Dinawa │..... │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Euproctis yulei, spec. │Dinawa │August │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Imaus pratti, spec. │Dinawa │August and September │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Deilemera kebea, spec. │Mount Kebea │March and April │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Deilemera dinawa, spec.│Dinawa │August and September │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Deilemera pratti, spec.│Owen Stanley range │September and March │
- │ nov. │ │ and April │
- │Mænas punctatostrigata,│Mount Kebea; Dinawa │August and March and │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ April │
- │Diacrisia pratti, spec.│Mount Kebea; Dinawa │March and April; │
- │ nov. │ │ August │
- │Diacrisia dinawa, spec.│Dinawa │August │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Diacrisia kebea, spec. │Kebea │March and April │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Celama fuscibasis, │Dinawa │August │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Celama aroa, spec. nov.│Dinawa; Aroa River │January and February │
- │Acatapaustus basifusca,│Dinawa │September and January │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Acatapaustus ekeikei, │Ekeikei │March │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Scoliacma hampsoni, │Dinawa │September │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Nishada melanopa, spec.│Dinawa │June to July │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Acco bicolora, spec. │Dinawa │August and February │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Pseudilema dinawa, │Dinawa │August and September │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Ilema ekeikei, spec. │Ekeikei │January and February │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Ilema dinawa, spec. │Dinawa │August and September │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Ilema costistrigata, │Ekeikei │August and September │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Ilema unicolora, spec. │Dinawa │August │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Ilema hades, spec. nov.│Dinawa │.... │
- │Ilema nivea, spec. nov.│Dinawa │September │
- │Chrysæglia bipunctata, │Mount Kebea; type, │March and April; │
- │ spec. nov. │ Dinawa │ August │
- │Œonistis bicolora, │Dinawa │May to June │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Macaduma bipunctata, │Dinawa, type; Ekeikei │August │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Halone flavopunctata, │Dinawa │August │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Chionæma dinawa, spec. │Dinawa │August │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Chionæma charybdis, │Dinawa │September │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Cleolosia aroa, spec. │Dinawa │September │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Asura ochreomaculata, │Dinawa │August │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Asura flaveola, spec. │Dinawa │September │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Asura brunneofasciata, │Dinawa │August and September │
- │ spec. nov. │ │ │
- │Asura unicolora, spec. │Dinawa │September │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Asura sagittaria, spec.│Dinawa │August │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Asura rosacea, spec. │Dinawa │August │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Asura dinawa, spec. │Dinawa │August │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Eugoa tricolora, spec. │Dinawa │August │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Eugoa conflua, spec. │Dinawa │August and September │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Amphoraceras │Dinawa │August │
- │ rothschildi │ │ │
- │Parabasis pratti, spec.│Dinawa │August │
- │ nov. │ │ │
- │Collusa ekeikei, spec. │Ekeikei; Mount Kebea │January and February; │
- │ nov. │ │ March and April │
- └───────────────────────┴──────────────────────┴──────────────────────┘
-
-
- APPENDIX II
- A NEW REPTILE FROM DINAWA
-
- _Toxicocalamus Stanleyanus_
-
-Rostral much broader than deep, just visible from above; internasals
-nearly as long as the præfrontals, which are in contact with the second
-upper labial and with the eye; frontal small, slightly broader than the
-supraocular, once and three-fourths as long as broad, as long as its
-distance from the end of the snout, a little shorter than the parietals;
-one postocular; temporals, one plus two; five upper labials, second and
-third entering the eye; three lower labials in contact with the anterior
-chin-shields, which are larger than the posterior. Scales in fifteen
-rows. Ventrals, 261; anal entire; subcaudals, twenty-five pairs; tail
-ending in a compressed, obtusely pointed scute, which is obtusely keeled
-above. Blackish-brown above; traces of a yellowish nuchal collar; upper
-lip white; two outer rows of scales white, each scale with a blackish
-central spot; ventrals and subcaudals white, with a black spot on each
-side, some of the ventrals with an interrupted blackish border.
-
-Total length, 610 millimetres; tail, 40.
-
-
- APPENDIX III
- A NEW FISH DISCOVERED BY THE EXPEDITION
-
- _Rhiacichthys Novæ Guineæ_
-
-Depth of body nearly equal to length of head, five to six times in total
-length. Diameter of eye six or seven times in length of head,
-interorbital width three times; snout but very slightly longer than
-postocular part of head. Dorsals VII., I. 8–9; longest spine, ¾; longest
-soft ray ⅘ length of head. Anal I. 8–9; longest ray as long as head.
-Pectoral about 1½ length of head; ventral as long as head, or a little
-longer. Caudal feebly emarginate. Caudal peduncle 2½ as long as deep.
-Scales strongly ciliated, 37 to 39 in a longitudinal series on each
-side, 14 or 16 round caudal peduncle. Dark olive above, whitish beneath.
-
-Total length, 225 millimetres.
-
-
- Printed by BALLANTYNE, HANSON & CO.
- Edinburgh & London
-
-[Illustration: PART OF SOUTH-WESTERN NEW GUINEA Showing Mr. PRATT’S
-Routes.]
-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-
- TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES
-
-
- 1. Silently corrected obvious typographical errors and variations in
- spelling.
- 2. Retained archaic, non-standard, and uncertain spellings as printed.
- 3. Enclosed italics font in _underscores_.
-
-*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TWO YEARS AMONG NEW GUINEA
-CANNIBALS ***
-
-Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will
-be renamed.
-
-Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
-law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
-so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the
-United States without permission and without paying copyright
-royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
-of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
-concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
-and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following
-the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use
-of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
-copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very
-easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
-of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project
-Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may
-do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected
-by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark
-license, especially commercial redistribution.
-
-START: FULL LICENSE
-
-THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
-PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
-
-To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
-distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
-(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
-Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
-www.gutenberg.org/license.
-
-Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
-and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
-(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
-the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
-destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your
-possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
-Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
-by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
-person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph
-1.E.8.
-
-1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
-used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
-agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
-things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
-paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this
-agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
-
-1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the
-Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
-of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual
-works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
-States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
-United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
-claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
-displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
-all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
-that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting
-free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm
-works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
-Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily
-comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
-same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when
-you share it without charge with others.
-
-1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
-what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
-in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
-check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
-agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
-distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
-other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no
-representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
-country other than the United States.
-
-1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
-
-1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
-immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear
-prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work
-on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the
-phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed,
-performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
-
- This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
- most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
- restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
- under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this
- eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the
- United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where
- you are located before using this eBook.
-
-1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is
-derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
-contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
-copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
-the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
-redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
-either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
-obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm
-trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
-with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
-must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
-additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
-will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works
-posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
-beginning of this work.
-
-1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
-License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
-work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
-
-1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
-electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
-prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
-active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm License.
-
-1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
-compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
-any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
-to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format
-other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official
-version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website
-(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
-to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
-of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain
-Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the
-full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
-
-1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
-performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
-unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
-access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-provided that:
-
-* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
- the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
- you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
- to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has
- agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
- within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
- legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
- payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
- Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
- Literary Archive Foundation."
-
-* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
- you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
- does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
- License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
- copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
- all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm
- works.
-
-* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
- any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
- electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
- receipt of the work.
-
-* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
- distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
-
-1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than
-are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
-from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of
-the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set
-forth in Section 3 below.
-
-1.F.
-
-1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
-effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
-works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
-Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
-contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
-or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
-intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
-other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
-cannot be read by your equipment.
-
-1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
-of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
-liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
-fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
-LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
-PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
-TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
-LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
-INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGE.
-
-1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
-defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
-receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
-written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
-received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
-with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
-with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
-lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
-or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
-opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
-the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
-without further opportunities to fix the problem.
-
-1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
-in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO
-OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
-LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
-
-1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
-warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
-damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
-violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
-agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
-limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
-unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
-remaining provisions.
-
-1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
-trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
-providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in
-accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
-production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
-including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
-the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
-or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or
-additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any
-Defect you cause.
-
-Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
-electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
-computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
-exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
-from people in all walks of life.
-
-Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
-assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
-goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
-remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
-and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future
-generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
-Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
-www.gutenberg.org
-
-Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation
-
-The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
-501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
-state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
-Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
-number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
-U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
-
-The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West,
-Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up
-to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website
-and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
-
-Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
-Literary Archive Foundation
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without
-widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
-increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
-freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
-array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
-($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
-status with the IRS.
-
-The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
-charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
-States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
-considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
-with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
-where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
-DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
-state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
-have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
-against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
-approach us with offers to donate.
-
-International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
-any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
-outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
-
-Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
-methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
-ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
-donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be
-freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
-distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of
-volunteer support.
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
-editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
-the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
-necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
-edition.
-
-Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
-facility: www.gutenberg.org
-
-This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
-including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
-subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.